JP7197253B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pinball game machine (generally called a "pachinko machine") and a reel-type game machine (generally called a "pachislot machine").

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines typified by pachinko machines, etc., it is known to provide a presentation button on the front side of the gaming machine in order to improve presentation effects (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-119856 A

However, in the game machine described in Patent Literature 1, when an abnormality occurs in the movable accessory, it occurs when the movable accessory tries to return to its initial position at the start of power supply to the game machine. In some cases, there are cases where an abnormality occurs during the movement of a movable accessory during production, but there are cases where appropriate notification cannot be performed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and its object is to be able to appropriately notify when an abnormality occurs in a movable accessory according to the situation at the time of occurrence of the abnormality. To provide a game machine capable of

The game machine according to claim 1 comprises effect control means for controlling effects in a game, and is controlled by the effect control means for the effects, and is operable within a predetermined operation range from an initial position at which the operation is started. a movable accessory having a light-emitting portion, a motor for driving the movable accessory, and a drive current for driving the movable accessory based on drive data output from the performance control means to the motor. In a game machine having a drive current supply means for supplying, the movable accessory is positioned at an initial position as an initialization operation executed when power supply to the game machine is started before the hall business is started. position detecting means for detecting that the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position; and that the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position by the position detecting means. retry operation means for moving the movable accessory to the initial position when is not detected; When the movable accessory is not positioned at the initial position and the position detection means cannot detect that the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position, there is an abnormality in the movable accessory based on the detection result. Abnormality determination means capable of determining that an abnormality has occurred; and notification means capable of notifying the outside when the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the movable accessory, A movable accessory determined to be abnormal by the abnormality determination means is prohibited from being operated by the movable accessory operation prohibiting means without being operated by the retry operation means. In the mode of notification performed by the notification means, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable accessory at the time of the initialization operation executed when power supply to the game machine is started before the hall business is started. When it is determined by the abnormality determination means, and when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable accessory during the performance of the movable accessory during the game in which the game is being played. Determination of abnormality by the abnormality determination means is common during the initialization operation and during the performance of the character object, but is performed in a different manner. The operation by the initial operation means is executed when the power supply is started, and the character object presentation is performed until the operation by the initial operation means is completed. The movable accessory determined to have an abnormality is prohibited from operating by the movable accessory operation prohibiting means, but is operated by the movable accessory operation prohibiting means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the light emission effect by the light emitting unit of the movable accessory for which the above is prohibited can be executed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying, when an abnormality occurs in a movable accessory, in accordance with the situation at the time of occurrence of the abnormality .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction; (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102; It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102; 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 108; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. 115 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 114; FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal plate; 4 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; 123 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in FIG. 122 to the peripheral control boards; It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 125; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit power is turned on in FIG. 128. FIG. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing a payout control unit main process and a payout control unit power-on process subsequent to FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of sprocket fixed position determination skip processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball slanting determination process; It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a put-out ball grip operation determination setting process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of payout setting processing; 10 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball-slip motion setting process; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of retry operation monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of mismatch counter reset determination processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of an error cancellation operation determination process; It is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, input signal confirmation processing (B) from the CR unit. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of connection abnormality determination processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for the upper tray liquid crystal; It is a block diagram of 2nd Embodiment which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a game machine; It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the game machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the operating states of the magnetic sensor and each transistor in tabular form; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration in which a plurality of sensor signal input units connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to base terminals of transistors in the detection circuit unit; It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 4) which has arrange|positioned the detection circuit part of the magnetic sensor input circuit in the main-control board. FIG. 11 is a circuit diagram showing another example (Embodiment 5) in which the detection circuit section of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board; It is a circuit diagram which shows the example (Example 6) which has arrange|positioned the avoidance part and detection circuit part of a magnetic sensor input circuit in a main-control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the example (Example 7) which has arrange|positioned the voltage output part of a magnetic sensor input circuit, an avoidance part, and a detection circuit part in a main-control board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing a basic configuration of electrical connection between a detection sensor section, a panel relay board and a main control board; FIG. 4 is a front view schematically showing each example of arrangement positions of the panel relay board and the main control board in the game machine; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of the avoidance unit with respect to the panel relay board and the main control board; It is a figure which shows the specific example of the vibration generation source in a game machine, and the arrangement example of a panel relay board and a main control board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a basic configuration mainly of electrical connections of a peripheral control board, a drive board, drive means, and an origin position detection sensor for detecting the origin positions of movable effects. FIG. 3 is a front view conceptually showing a plurality of movable accessories for presentation provided in the game machine and grouping of the plurality of movable accessories. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a plurality of movable accessories belonging to the accessory group 01 are restored to their initial positions; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison target for this embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control using a fixed channel method; It shows the relationship between the game state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production|presentation time chart. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of sound control by an automatic channel method as the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method; It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production|presentation time chart. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of automatic channel control work information stored in an AUTO group channel control work area provided in a peripheral control RAM; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of empty channel search processing when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of empty channel search processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern of sound control according to each channel method or a combination thereof; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in the present embodiment; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of empty channel search processing when executing control for outputting sound according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of conditions for selecting a channel for switching sound output (stopping sound reproduction) when a channel is not available at the time of outputting a new sound in this embodiment. 4 is a timing chart showing a production example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channels to which each sound effect is output. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the order of priority of sound effects in the production example of the present embodiment; 4 is a timing chart showing an example of changes in volume of sound effects in the first half of the present embodiment, where (A) shows output timing of sound effects, and (B) shows changes in volume of sound effects. It is a figure which shows the screen structural example of the production|presentation in the modification of this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in a modification of the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of volume changes of sound effects in the latter half of variation of the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows output timing of sound effects, and (B) shows volume changes of each sound effect. It is a block diagram showing a ground system of the gaming machine. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit provided with the ground circuit board as seen obliquely from the rear; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a housing case portion housing a ground circuit board, viewed from above; It is a circuit diagram of a ground circuit board. It is a figure for demonstrating the fixed aspect of a ball tank.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, main frame and outer frame 1 is an exploded perspective view viewed from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 90) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for putting out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and peripherals arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing movable effect and light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, it has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 that provide a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a gate section 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, or the reverse effect unit 3100 to display a predetermined effect image, or a movable effect or A player can be entertained by performing a lighting effect.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 to be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c projecting into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; , and reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be favorably guided forward (toward the player).

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 83). and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view.
The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the body frame 4, The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (the part extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 . The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1i. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tampering prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and also the game balls stored in the upper tray 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 102) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removal button of the tray unit, the upper tray ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission section, and the operation rod 143c moves downward along with the movement of the operation transmission section. will also move relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to form a partition. is released. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. The force of the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 when a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string to put the illegal game ball B into or out of the first start opening or the like. By inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b, the V shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b It can be cut by the narrowed part of the string, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. FIG. 36(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. - 特許庁As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 has a penetrating ball passage 150a that penetrates front to back at the upper left corner in a front view, and communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 with the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full-tank ball receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a in front view and can communicate with the full-tank guideway of the lower full-tank ball path unit of the body frame 4 is provided. .

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and despite being shot by the ball launching device of the body frame 4, it did not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received in a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c opened forward near the lower right corner in a front view. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 and a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183 .

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d which protrude outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a protrudes outward from the portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is translucent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth projection 182d is the first projection 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a plate unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 rotatable by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular performance operation ring 330 having a rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and has.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in the shape of a shallow box with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the plate lower right decorative board 288. , and the operation unit relay board 392 . The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning the cash or prepaid card put into the machine after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B.例文帳に追加

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the withdrawal button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the top, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b for guiding the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 abuts on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, and the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper disk ball removal slider 242 at the upper movement end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and an upper right plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the upper left and lower plate decoration units 270 and 280, respectively, and the upper right and lower right plate decoration units 275 and 280, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

In addition, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decoration body 271 extending in the left and right direction and having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration body 271, A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The upper left plate reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left plate decoration body 271 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the top left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light.

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 includes a plate upper right decorative body 276 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is attached to the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This plate upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The plate top right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate top right decoration 276 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate top right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decoration body 276 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 which is semicylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a lower left plate reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, A lower left plate decorative substrate 283 is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in milky white.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decoration body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light emission.

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a plate lower right decoration body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and has a central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b disposed between the inner peripheral portion and the inner peripheral portion.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from behind in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in a plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower reflector 315 attached to the plate center lower reflector 315 to direct light forward. and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side thereof. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

Since the effect operation unit 300 has a gap between the central pressing operation part 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b and a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b and the rotation operating part 302, the effect operation unit 300 can be operated from above. , liquids such as coffee and juice, and powdery substances such as cigarette ash and dust may enter. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the effect operation unit 300 may malfunction, or a gap between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, or a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the rotation operating portion 302 may occur. If a foreign object is caught in the center pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, the rotary operation portion 302, etc. may not move smoothly. Therefore, a drain hole 311a is formed in the unit lower cover 311 as a mechanism for discharging these foreign substances from the pachinko machine 1 to the outside.

Although a plurality of drainage holes 311a are provided, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 such as the lower tray 202 are not provided directly below some of the drainage holes 311a, and foreign matter is discharged from these drainage holes 311a. When the pachinko machine 1 is placed, it falls directly onto the mounting surface of the island facility on which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. With such a configuration, the foreign matter discharged from the drain hole 311a can be kept away from the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being soiled by the discharged foreign matter. Become.

In the present embodiment, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 such as the lower tray 202 are not provided directly below some of the drainage holes 311a. good too. With such a configuration, the liquid stays in the lower tray 202, so that it is possible to prevent the mounting surface of the island facility on which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted from being soiled.

The unit lower cover 311 is made of opaque polycarbonate resin with a thickness of about 2 mm. With such a configuration, even if foreign matter that has not been discharged through the drainage hole 311a remains around the drainage hole 311a inside the unit lower cover 311, the presence of the foreign matter cannot be confirmed from the outside, so the appearance is improved. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease.

On the other hand, the unit lower cover 311 may be made of transparent resin so that the inside can be visually recognized. With such a configuration, when a foreign object enters the performance operation unit 300 from above and flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the door frame 3 is opened and the plate unit 200 is removed from the door frame 3. Furthermore, it is possible to detect foreign objects entering the production operation unit 300 by observing from the outside without taking the trouble of removing the production operation unit 300 from the plate unit 200 and confirming the internal state of the production operation unit 300.例文帳に追加, the discharge state of foreign matter through the drain hole 311a and the staying state of the foreign matter in the unit lower cover 311 can be confirmed, and depending on the state of entry of the foreign matter into the performance operation unit 300, the business using the pachinko machine 1 can be stopped or the pachinko machine can be stopped. It is possible to appropriately perform the treatment such as cleaning of 1 and replacement of parts.

Although the embodiment in which the unit lower cover 311 is provided with the drain hole 311a has been shown, the drain hole 311a may not be provided. Even with such a configuration, the above-described effects can be obtained both when the unit lower cover 311 is made of an opaque resin and when it is made of a transparent resin. In addition, by not providing the drainage hole 311a, it is possible to prevent the player from performing mischievous or harassing actions such as inserting a fine metal wire such as a wire or a piano wire into the drainage hole 311a from below. becomes possible.

The drain hole 311a is formed in a cylindrical shape by hollowing out the unit lower cover 311 . With such a configuration, when the liquid enters the performance operation unit 300 as a foreign matter from above and flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the resistance of the liquid passing through the drain hole 311a is reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 is operated. It is possible to quickly discharge to the outside. Also, when solids such as cigarette ash enter the production operation unit 300 as foreign matter from above and flow down to the unit lower cover 311, the solids passing through the drain hole 311a are prevented from remaining in the drain hole 311a. It is possible to quickly discharge the balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Although the embodiment in which the drainage hole 311a is formed linearly in a cylindrical shape as if the unit lower cover 311 was hollowed out has been described, the drainage hole 311a may be formed in such a non-linear shape. For example, the shape of the drain hole may be curved in an arc shape or an S shape. With such a configuration, it is a member provided in the performance operation unit 300 to prevent the player from mischievous or harassing behavior such as inserting a thin metal wire such as a wire or piano wire into the drain hole 311a from below. It is possible to protect the vibration speaker 354, the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the operation section relay board unit 390, and the like.

The drain hole 311a is formed in a cylindrical shape by hollowing out the unit lower cover 311, and has a diameter of about 2 mm. The drain hole 311a is provided to discharge foreign objects that have entered the effect operation unit 300, but it is necessary to bear in mind that the player may mischief or harass the player by inserting a foreign object into the drain hole 311a. There is Foreign objects to be inserted include the player's finger (about 15-20 mm in diameter), a game ball (about 11 mm in diameter), a cigarette (about 8 mm in diameter), and thin metal wires such as wire and piano wire (0.2-20 mm in diameter). 2 mm) is assumed. In order to prevent the insertion of these foreign substances, it is desirable to make the diameter of the drain hole 311a smaller than the diameter of these foreign substances. On the other hand, if the diameter of the drain hole 311a is reduced, the effect of the surface tension of the liquid flowing down into the unit lower cover 311 becomes unignorable, and the efficiency of discharging the liquid from the drain hole 311a may decrease. be. Therefore, in this embodiment, the diameter of the drain hole 311a is set to approximately 2 mm.

Among the above-described foreign objects that are expected to be inserted, the player's fingers, game balls, and cigarettes can be impulsively inserted into the drain hole 311a without prior preparation. On the other hand, thin metal wires such as wires and piano wires are not normally carried by the player, and unless they are brought to the hall intentionally, they cannot be inserted into the drain hole 311a. Compared to the possibility of such a situation occurring, it is considered that the possibility of the player's finger, game ball, or cigarette being inserted is relatively high. Therefore, as a countermeasure against situations in which a player's finger, a game ball, or a cigarette is accidentally inserted, the diameter of the drain hole 311a should be less than 8 mm. With such a configuration, the vibration speaker 354, which is a member provided in the production operation unit 300, is prevented from mischief or harassment such as inserting the player's finger, game ball, or cigarette from below into the drain hole 311a. , the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the operation section relay board unit 390, etc. can be protected.

Although an example in which the drain hole 311a has a cylindrical shape is shown, the shape of the drain hole 311a is not limited to a cylindrical shape, and may be a slit shape, a tapered shape, a square shape such as a square or a rectangle. good too. Even in these shapes, by setting the width of the narrowest part of the drain hole 311a to be less than 8 mm, the drain hole 311a is protected from mischief and harassment such as inserting the player's finger, game ball, or cigarette into the drain hole 311a. It is possible to protect the vibration speaker 354, the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the operation part relay board unit 390, etc., which are members provided in the effect operation unit 300. FIG.

The drain hole 311a is formed in a shape as if the unit lower cover 311 was hollowed out in a cylindrical shape. It is in an inclined state so as to be positioned rearward as it goes downward. In this embodiment, it is only slanted rearward at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical. When the liquid is discharged from the drain hole 311a as a foreign object, the liquid is discharged rearward with momentum. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from splashing onto the clothes of the player who is playing a game while sitting on a chair. Also, when the player is not playing a game, it is possible to prevent the liquid from splashing onto the seating portion of the chair. In addition, when a large amount of liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 and a large amount of liquid remains inside the unit lower cover 311, the water pressure applied to the drain hole 311a becomes stronger, and the liquid flows vigorously toward the rear side. is discharged, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of preventing the liquid from splashing onto the player's clothes or the like.

Although the embodiment in which the drainage hole 311a is inclined so as to be located rearward as it goes downward has been shown, the drainage hole 311a may be formed so as not to be inclined. With such a configuration, the drop position of the liquid discharged from the drain hole 311a is limited to just below the drain hole 311a. It is possible to easily predict the drop position of the liquid at the time, and to make it easier to take countermeasures against the drop of the liquid.

Although the embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is tilted rearward as it goes downward has been shown, it may be tilted forward as it goes downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged from the drain hole 311a as a foreign object, the liquid is discharged forward with momentum. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling into the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and the ball receiving tray in each machine counting system.

Although the drain hole 311a is inclined rearward as it goes downward, it may be inclined leftward as it goes downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged from the drain hole 311a as a foreign object, the liquid is discharged with momentum toward the left. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling on the player's hand operating the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball tray in each machine counting system, and the handle 182. It becomes possible to

Although the drain hole 311a is inclined rearward as it goes downward, it may be inclined rightward as it goes downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged from the drain hole 311a as a foreign object, the liquid is discharged with momentum toward the right. With such a configuration, the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball tray in each machine counting system, the inter-machine machine generally installed on the left side of the pachinko machine 1, and the each machine counting system It is possible to prevent the liquid from dropping into the flow path connecting the ball tray and the inter-machine.

An embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is tilted to the rear as it goes downward, and a state in which the drain hole 311a is tilted to the front, left, and right as it goes downward. Although the modified example is shown, the drain hole 311a may be inclined in a combination of the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling onto players, game facilities, and the like. For example, when the drain hole 311a is tilted to the left front as it goes downward, the right hand of the player who operates the handle 182, the dollar box, the ball tray in each machine counting system, the machine between machines. , it is possible to prevent the liquid from dropping into the flow path connecting the ball tray and the inter-machine in each machine counting system.

In this embodiment, a plurality of (specifically, eight) drain holes 311 a are provided below the unit lower cover 311 . By adopting such a configuration, even if a part of the drainage hole 311a is clogged with a foreign object that has flowed down or is blocked by gum from the outside by the player, the drainage function of the drainage hole 311a can be maintained. can be secured.

Although an embodiment in which a plurality of (specifically, eight) drain holes 311a are provided below the unit lower cover 311 has been described, only one drain hole 311a may be provided. By adopting such a configuration, compared with the case where a plurality of drain holes 311a are provided, the drop position of the liquid is limited, so it is possible to reduce the area of the playground facility that is soiled by the drop of the liquid.

In this embodiment, a plurality of (specifically, eight) drain holes 311a are provided below the spherical unit lower cover 311 that protrudes downward. They are provided at different heights, such as two at the bottom and two at the top. With such a configuration, when the amount of liquid that has flowed inside the unit lower cover 311 is small, the liquid is discharged only from the four drain holes 311a at the lowermost end. Since the four drain holes 311a at the lowest end are close to each other and the position where the liquid falls is limited, it is possible to prevent the playground facilities from being soiled by the liquid falling. On the other hand, when a large amount of liquid has flowed in and a large amount of liquid has accumulated inside the unit lower cover 311, the two drainage holes 311a provided at the middle height and the two drainage holes 311a provided above Liquid is also discharged from one drain hole 311a. In this case, it is possible to increase the amount of liquid discharged per unit time as compared with the case where the four drain holes 311a at the bottom end are used to discharge the liquid.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a plate center upper decoration 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided, the protruding semicircular arc extending in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. - 特許庁The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are continuous with the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and milky white.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The upper plate center decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower plate center decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 are caused to emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and it is possible to make it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operating section base 320 of the effect operating unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body portion 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, and can amplify the vibrations.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

Since the main body part 321 is attached so that its upper part is tilted forward, the liquid that has flowed into the bottom wall 321a flows down on the bottom wall 321a and moves forward. A plurality of (specifically, three) through-holes 321b are provided at the front end of the bottom wall 321a. fall towards. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down.

An embodiment in which the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a has been shown, but instead of the vibration speaker 354, a driving/vibration generating motor, a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, and a dish unit relay board 214 A substrate box 391 containing an operation portion relay substrate 392 for relaying a signal sent from to the effect operation unit 300 may be attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which liquid enters these articles and the articles break down.

In the present embodiment, the vibration speaker 354 is attached substantially in the center of the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, but the position where the vibration speaker 354 is attached may be the area on the rear side of the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. With such a configuration, even if the mounting position of the vibration speaker 354 becomes high, and a large amount of liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 and stays inside the unit lower cover 311, the bottom wall 321a will not be affected. It is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the device and causing the vibration speaker 354 to malfunction.

In this embodiment, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom surface of the bottom wall 321a. may be covered. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the bottom surface of the bottom wall 321a and enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom surface of the bottom wall 321a, causing the vibration speaker 354 to malfunction. It is possible to prevent

Although an example in which the vertical wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the vibration speaker 354 has been shown, the vertical wall may partially cover the circumference of the vibration speaker 354 . For example, at least the rear side of the vibration speaker 354 may be covered with an upright wall. Also, the standing wall may cover at least the vicinity of the position where the outer periphery of the vibration speaker 354 and the peripheral edge of the bottom wall 321a are closest to each other. In addition, the part where the wiring of the vibration speaker 354 is provided may not be provided with the corresponding part. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the bottom surface of the bottom wall 321a and enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom surface of the bottom wall 321a, causing the vibration speaker 354 to malfunction. It is possible to prevent Furthermore, compared to the case where a standing wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the vibration speaker 354, the heat dissipation of the vibration speaker 354 can be enhanced.

A plurality of ribs for increasing the strength of the bottom wall 321a are provided on the upper surface of the bottom wall 321a in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. Moreover, the height of the rib in the left-right direction (about 0.5 mm) is lower than the height of the rib in the front-rear direction (about 2 mm). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly guide the liquid that has flowed into the operation portion base 320 to the through hole 321b while maintaining the strength of the bottom wall 321a.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 .

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. A plurality of outer and lower cover attachment portions 336b are provided. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the performance operation unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the contents of the player participation type presentation according to the direction of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring side gear portion 350a that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect the transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decoration board 352a on the front side and a rear decoration board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 on the upper side. The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331 are passed through the ring outer side of the rotary operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to present the player with a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5e-7. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 with the output direction directed upward.

Here, briefly explaining the principle of the vibration speaker 354, the vibration speaker 354 includes a voice coil, a magnet, a yoke, a diaphragm, etc., like a general dynamic speaker. Also, the magnetic circuit unit including the magnet is elastically supported in the vibration speaker 354 . When a sine wave of a predetermined frequency is input from the sound source IC to the voice coil, the voice coil is excited, and the elastically supported magnetic circuit section resonates to generate vibration, resulting in a vibration speaker. 354 is configured to transmit vibrations to the outside.
On the other hand, as a conventional method for generating vibration, a method is known in which vibration is generated by rotating a motor (so-called "eccentric motor") in which an eccentric weight is attached to the output shaft of a cylindrical coreless motor. .
Compared to this method, the method using the vibration speaker 354 has advantages such as being thin and space-saving, being able to obtain stronger vibrations than the method using an eccentric motor of the same size, and having high vibration directivity. There is In addition, the vibration speaker 354 has the advantage of high durability, whereas the method using the eccentric motor places a large load on the output shaft and is easily broken.

The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the main body part 321 via the leg part 361b of the button unit base 361, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is transmitted from the bottom wall of the main body part 321 to the button unit base. It is configured to be transmitted to the effect operation button unit 360 via the leg portion 361b of 361.
In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the body portion 321 via the flange portion 322 , and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is transmitted from the bottom wall of the body portion 321 via the flange portion 322 to the effect operation ring 330 . It is configured to be transmitted to ring 330 .
In addition, the main body portion 321 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is transmitted to the main body portion. The power is transmitted from the bottom wall of the unit 321 to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321 .
Furthermore, it is configured such that vibrations from the unit lower cover 311 and the flange portion 322 are transmitted to the unit front cover 312 .

In this way, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the bottom wall of the operation section base 320, and by transmitting this vibration through the operation section base 320, the entire presentation operation unit 300 can be vibrated.

In addition, the axis perpendicularly passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the axis perpendicularly passing through the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation portion 303 are the same. Since the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration in the axial direction of the axis passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354 vertically, the axis passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation portion 303 are perpendicular to each other. Vibrations output from the vibration speaker 354 can be suitably transmitted to the pressing operation section 303 by making the axes passing through the same.

In addition, the axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the axis that vertically passes through the center of the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation portion 303 are the same. Since the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration in the axial direction of the axis passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354 vertically, the axis passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the center of the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation portion 303 are aligned. By making the axis passing vertically the same, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be suitably transmitted to the pressing operation section 303 .

Further, the vibration direction of the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 and the operation direction of the pressing operation portion 303 are configured to be parallel. In this case, it is possible to directly transmit the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 to the player in response to the player's operation of the pressing operation unit 303 .

Further, the vibration speaker 354 is not attached to a member that moves when pressed by the player, like the pressing operation part 303, but is a bottom wall of the main body 321 that does not directly move when pressed by the player. , is attached so as to be spaced apart from the pressing operation portion 303 . As a result, even when the player strongly operates the pressing operation unit 303 and a strong impact is transmitted to the effect operation unit 301, the vibration speaker 354 is moved by the player's pressing operation like the pressing operation unit 303. As compared with the case where the vibration speaker 354 is installed inside a member, it is possible to suppress the impact applied to the movable body such as the voice coil and the diaphragm provided inside the vibration speaker 354, and to prevent them from being damaged.

Note that the means for generating vibration is not limited to the vibration speaker 354. For example, even if an eccentric motor is employed as the means for generating vibration, the eccentric motor can also be moved by pressing the player. It is possible to prevent the output shaft of the eccentric motor from being damaged by attaching it to a location where there is no damage.

Note that the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 by transmitting the generated vibration to the bottom wall of the operation section base 320. By transmitting the vibration to the plate unit 200 to which the unit 300 is attached, the lower plate 202 of the plate decoration unit 250 that constitutes the plate unit 200 and the upper plate 201 of the plate base unit 210 that also constitutes the plate unit 200 are activated. You can vibrate.

In this case, when the performance operation unit 300 is vibrated as a performance in the game machine, the vibration occurs as a performance even for the player who does not touch the performance operation unit 300 and puts his or her hand on the upper tray 201.例文帳に追加Since it can be made to recognize that, it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Further, by vibrating the upper tray 201, it is possible to smoothly supply the game balls B staying on the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540. - 特許庁

Further, by vibrating the lower tray 202, it is possible to smoothly discharge the game balls B staying in the lower tray 202 to the lower side of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

Although the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the entire production operation unit 300 and further transmits the vibration to the plate unit 200 to which the production operation unit 300 is attached, the vibration is not transmitted to the handle unit 180. It is desirable to This is because the vibration of the handle unit 180 may interfere with the operation of the handle 182 by the player.
In order to prevent the transmission of vibration to the handle unit 180, it is preferable to provide a vibration absorbing member inside the handle insertion opening 252g or adjust the magnitude of vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 300 has a gap between the central pressing operation part 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b and a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b and the rotation operating part 302, the effect operation unit 300 is positioned above the effect operation unit 300. There is a possibility that liquids such as coffee and juice and powdery substances such as cigarette ash and dust may enter as foreign substances. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the effect operation unit 300 may malfunction, or a gap between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, or a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the rotation operating portion 302 may occur. If a foreign object is caught in the center pressing operation part 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b, the rotation operation part 302, etc., there is a possibility of causing a problem such as not being able to move smoothly. It is desirable to provide a mechanism to

Therefore, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration as an effect in the game machine and the entire effect operation unit 300 vibrates, these foreign substances fall downward in the effect operation unit 300 and reach the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311. It is constructed so that it can gather and finally be discharged to the outside through the drain hole 311a. Further, since the vibration speaker 354 is installed below the production operation unit 300, it is possible to efficiently transmit the vibration to the unit lower cover 311 which is also installed below the production operation unit 300. .

The generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 is used as an effect in the gaming machine. At this time, foreign objects can also be discharged at the same time, so it is possible to deal with the entry of foreign objects without interrupting the game. becomes. In addition, as an effect in the game machine, the effect operation unit 300 can be operated normally for a long period of time because the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 at a predetermined probability, and the foreign object is periodically discharged. becomes possible.

Although an example in which vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 has been shown as an effect by the game machine, the vibration speaker 354 can be arbitrarily generated by operating the effect operation unit 301 by the clerk or the player who has let the foreign object enter. You may enable it to generate a vibration.
In this case, vibration can be generated by the vibration speaker 354 by operating the effect operation unit 301 when the game is not played or when the power is turned on. As a result, the amount of foreign matter entering the performance operation unit 300 is large, and the foreign matter is discharged from the drainage hole 311a more quickly than in the case of waiting for the chance occurrence of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 as the performance of the game machine. becomes possible.
In addition, when the vibration of the vibration speaker 354 is arbitrarily generated by operating the effect operation unit 301, the vibration by the vibration speaker 354 is different in duration and strength compared to the case of using the vibration in the game machine. Vibration may be generated.

On the other hand, as an effect in the game machine, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is raised or lowered or the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated, the foreign object that has entered is ejected in the same manner as when vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. can be encouraged.
In addition, similarly to the case where vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, the store clerk or the player who has let the foreign object enter operates the effect operation unit 301 to arbitrarily raise or lower the pressing operation unit 303. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 may be rotated.
In this case, by operating the effect operation unit 301 during non-game time when the symbols do not change or when the power is turned on, the push operation unit 303 can be raised or lowered and the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. good. As a result, the amount of foreign objects entering the effect operation unit 300 is large, and compared to waiting for the rise or fall of the pressing operation unit 303 or the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 to occur accidentally as the effect in the game machine. , it is possible to quickly discharge the foreign matter from the drain hole 311a.
Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301, when the press operation unit 303 is arbitrarily raised or lowered and the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated, the press operation unit 303 is raised or lowered, and the effect operation ring 330 is rotated. As compared with the case where rotation is used for presentation in a game machine, the elevation and rotation may be generated at different durations and different speeds.

In this embodiment, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration, it outputs a sound wave with a frequency of about 40 Hz±2 Hz. Considering the masking effect of environmental sounds such as the pachinko hall where the game machine is installed and audible sounds output from other speakers (for example, the main body frame speaker 622) provided in the game machine itself, it is practically not recognizable by human hearing. .

On the other hand, the vibration speaker 354 is controlled to emit an audible sound like a normal speaker by applying a signal outputting a sound wave with a higher frequency than when generating vibration to the vibration speaker 354 from the sound source IC. It is also possible to

Thus, the vibration speaker 354 provided in the effect operation unit 300 can output both vibration and audible sound according to the signal given from the sound source IC.

Further, by changing the amplitude of the signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the intensity of vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 can be changed.

Also, the signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 may be supplied continuously or may be supplied intermittently. For example, by continuously supplying a signal for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), continuous vibration is generated, or the supply of the signal is started and stopped every predetermined period (for example, 1 second). By doing so, intermittent vibration may be generated. This makes it possible to improve interest.

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the operation ring drive motor 342 is driven to rotate the rotary operation unit 302. At this time, when vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, the operation unit base 320 is moved. A strong vibration is transmitted to the operation ring drive motor 342 via the motor, and the operation ring drive motor 342 may be out of step. Therefore, it is desirable that the driving of the operation ring drive motor 342 and the generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 are performed exclusively. For example, after rotating the rotary operation unit 302 by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 and then stopping the rotation, the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration, or the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration and then generates vibration. is stopped, the operation ring drive motor 342 is driven to rotate the rotary operation portion 302 . As a result, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be prevented from stepping out, and the accuracy of the rotation control of the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved.

Further, by driving the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the pressing operation portion 303 is raised or lowered. As in the case above, it is desirable that the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 and the generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 are performed exclusively. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 from being out of step, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the control for raising or lowering the pressing operation portion 303 .

Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301 during non-playing when the symbols do not change or when the power is turned on, the vibration speaker 354 can generate vibration to be transmitted to the game area 5a. As a result, without opening the door frame 3, a ball clogged state (a state called "grape") in which the game ball B is clogged between obstacle nails or between an obstacle nail and various accessories, and a movable It is possible to eliminate the state in which the ball is caught by the winning device (so-called "ball biting" state).

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. ing.

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom and closed at the upper end side, and is attached to the upper end of the central button main body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363 . and a center button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted that are capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; A translucent cylindrical perimeter decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the perimeter button decoration substrate 377 on the outer perimeter side and that is three-dimensionally decorated, and lifts up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the perimeter decorative lens 379. and a transparent outer perimeter button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a center button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral press operating portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, and a central hole 364b that penetrates vertically. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373 e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 , and a pair of guide bosses 373 f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373 b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 .

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377 . The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decorative lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the state where the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When the effect operation unit 300 is assembled into the effect operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

The effect operation button unit 360 is placed in the operation part base 320 with its upper part tilted forward. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the control panel 1 is also placed in the operating section base 320 in a tilted state. With such a configuration, even if liquid enters from the gap between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, the entering liquid flows down the upper surface of the gear cover 372 toward the front side. It flows down into the operation unit base 320 .

An operation button elevation drive motor 367 is attached to a rear region of the bottom surface of the button unit base 361 . With such a configuration, even if liquid enters from the gap between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, it is possible to prevent the liquid from flowing down to the operation button elevation drive motor 367. becomes.

The operation button elevation drive motor 367 has an operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a for power supply and control on its side surface. It is attached to the button unit base 361 so that it faces. With such a configuration, even if liquid flows down from the peripheral edge of the gear cover 372 toward the operation unit base 320, the liquid contacts the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a, causing an electrical problem such as a short circuit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In this embodiment, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is attached to the bottom surface of the button unit base 361. A vertical wall is provided on the bottom surface of the button unit base 361 so as to stand vertically with respect to the button unit base 361. The entire circumference of the operation button lifting drive motor 367 may be covered. With this configuration, the liquid flows down the bottom surface of the button unit base 361 and enters the operation button elevation drive motor 367 attached to the bottom surface of the button unit base 361 . It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a failure occurs.

Although an example in which the vertical wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 has been shown, the vertical wall may cover a part of the periphery of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 . For example, at least the rear side of the operation button lifting drive motor 367 may be covered with an upright wall. Further, the vertical wall may cover at least the vicinity of the position where the outer periphery of the operation button lifting drive motor 367 and the peripheral edge of the button unit base 361 are closest to each other. Further, as for the portion where the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a is provided, an upright wall may be provided so as to cover at least the portion corresponding to the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a. On the other hand, when the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a is attached to the button unit base 361 so as to face the central side of the button unit base 361, an upright wall is provided at a portion corresponding to the operation button elevation drive motor terminal 367a. may be omitted. With this configuration, the liquid flows down the bottom surface of the button unit base 361 and enters the operation button elevation drive motor 367 attached to the bottom surface of the button unit base 361 . It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a failure occurs. Furthermore, compared to the case where a standing wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the heat dissipation of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 can be enhanced.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operating section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operating section base 320 and an operating section relay board 392 attached inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

The circuit board box 391 has a rectangular appearance and is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 so that the long sides thereof are oriented in the horizontal direction. Further, the board box 391 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized.

The back side surface of the operation part relay board 392 is provided for connection with various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the effect operation unit 300 and for connection with the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. A plurality of operation portion relay board connector portions 392a are provided. The board box 391 is provided with a board box opening 391b at a position corresponding to the operation section relay board connector section 392a and having a shape as if a flat surface forming the rear side of the board box 391 is hollowed out. The shape of the board box opening portion 391b is a shape that matches the shape of the operation portion relay board connector portion 392a, specifically, a square or rectangular shape. Various substrates, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the production operation unit 300 and connectors provided at the ends of wiring from the plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 are connected through the substrate box opening 391b. It is connected to the operation section relay board connector section 392a.

In the present embodiment, the board box opening 391b is provided in a shape that cuts out the plane forming the rear side of the board box 391. However, the board box opening 391b is erected rearward from the entire peripheral edge of the board box opening 391b. You may make it provide the waterproof wall 391c which carries out. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the flat surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the waterproof wall 391c prevents the liquid from flowing down into the substrate box 391. It can be suppressed.

A modified example in which the waterproof wall 391c is provided rearward from the entire peripheral edge of the board box opening 391b provided on the surface forming the rear side of the board box 391 is shown. Instead of the entire periphery of the portion 391b, only a portion of the periphery may be formed. For example, at least the waterproof wall 391c may be provided on the peripheral edge corresponding to the upper half area of the board box opening 391b, or the upper side of the board box opening 391b having a square or rectangular shape may be provided. At least the waterproof wall 391c may be provided on the peripheral edge, or at least the waterproof wall 391c may not be provided on the peripheral edge corresponding to the lower side of the square or rectangular board box opening 391b. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from flowing down into the substrate box 391 . Further, it is possible to easily attach and detach the connector in the substrate box opening 391b.

A modified example in which the waterproof wall 391c is provided rearward from the peripheral edge of the board box opening 391b provided on the surface forming the rear side of the board box 391 has been shown. A portion other than the periphery of 391b may be used. For example, a waterproof wall 391c may be provided at a position spaced apart from the board box opening 391b. Also, one waterproof wall 391c may be provided to prevent the liquid from flowing into the plurality of substrate box openings 391b. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the flat surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the waterproof wall 391c prevents the liquid from flowing down into the substrate box 391. It can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to easily attach and detach the connector in the substrate box opening 391b.

Further, the waterproof wall 391c may be formed in a linear shape so as to extend downward as the waterproof wall 391c goes rightward or leftward. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the flat surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the waterproof wall 391c prevents the liquid from flowing down into the substrate box 391. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the waterproof wall 391c is inclined, the liquid flowing down can be guided to the right or left, and the liquid flowing down can be kept away from other articles below the waterproof wall 391c. becomes possible.

The operation part relay board 392 is attached at a position between various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the effect operation unit 300 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 in the front-rear direction. . By adopting such a configuration, the length of wiring connecting various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the effect operation unit 300 and the operation part relay board 392, the operation part relay board 392 and the plate unit relay It is possible to shorten the total length of wiring connecting to the substrate 214 .

The board box 391 is attached so as to be spaced in the front-rear direction from the gap between the central pressing operation section 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operating section 303b and the gap between the outer peripheral pressing operating section 303b and the rotating operating section 302 in the effect operating unit 300. It is Also, the board box 391 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 . With such a configuration, when the liquid enters the gap between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b or the gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the rotation operating portion 302 in the effect operation unit 300 However, it is possible to prevent the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 from becoming a wall and causing the liquid to flow down into the substrate box 391 .

Further, the substrate box 391 is attached to the rear surface of the main body portion 321 of the operating portion base 320 so that the upper portion thereof is tilted forward. By adopting such a configuration, the area of the board box 391 in a plan view can be reduced compared to the case where the board box 391 is attached so as to be parallel to the horizontal plane, and the air flows down from above. It is possible to reduce the influence of the liquid.

In this embodiment, the circuit board box 391 is attached to the rear surface of the main body part 321 of the operation part base 320 so that its upper part is tilted forward. You can install it. By adopting such a configuration, the board box 391 in a plan view is larger than the case where the board box 391 is mounted parallel to the horizontal plane or the board box 391 is mounted so that the upper part of the board box 391 is tilted forward. area can be reduced, and the influence of the liquid flowing down from above can be reduced.

Although the board box 391 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 so as to be perpendicular to the horizontal plane, the board box 391 should be mounted so that the long sides of the board box 391 face up and down. may With such a configuration, the area of the substrate box 391 in plan view can be further reduced, and the influence of the liquid flowing down from above can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, a board box opening 391b is provided in a shape that cuts out a plane forming the rear side of the board box 391, and through the board box opening 391b, various objects provided in the effect operation unit 300 are provided. board, motor, sensor, etc., and the connector provided at the end of the wiring from the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is connected to the operation part relay board connector part 392a, but the board box 391 is covered. The board box cover 393 may be attached from behind the board box 391 so as to cover at least a portion of the board box 391 . It is desirable that the board box cover 393 be formed in a planar shape parallel to the plane forming the rear side of the board box 391 . In addition, it is desirable that the substrate box cover 393 has a constant gap between the plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 and the planar portion forming part of the substrate box cover 393 . Further, the substrate box cover 393 may have a rearward convex shape to cover at least a part of the upper end, the left and right ends, and the lower end of the substrate box 391 . With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the operation section relay board connector section 392a.

A modified example in which the board box cover 393 that covers the board box 391 is attached from the rear of the board box 391 has been shown. A surplus portion of the wiring connected to 392a may be accommodated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which various wirings in the effect operation unit 300 are soiled by the liquid that has flowed down.

A modification has been shown in which the substrate box cover 393 that covers the substrate box 391 is attached from the rear of the substrate box 391. However, the projecting substrate box cover liquid that guides the liquid that has flowed down to the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393 in the left-right direction is The guiding portion 393a may be provided on the rear surface of the board box cover 393 so as to stand upright. Specifically, on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393, the substrate box cover liquid guide portion 393a may be formed in a straight line so that the substrate box cover liquid guide portion 393a goes downward as it goes rightward or leftward. In addition, on the back surface of the substrate box cover 393, two linear substrate box cover liquid guide portions 393a are provided in the shape of an upwardly convex mountain, so as to distribute the liquid flowing down to the right and left. can be An example in which the substrate box cover liquid guide portion 393a is tilted rightward or leftward has been shown, but the substrate box cover liquid guide portion 393a may be provided parallel to the horizontal direction. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to keep the liquid that has flowed down to the board box cover 393 away from the part in the gaming machine 1 where the liquid should not flow down.

An example has been shown in which the substrate box cover liquid guide portion 393a is provided so as to stand upright on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393, but the substrate box cover 393 may be provided instead of or in addition to the substrate box cover liquid guide portion 393a as described above. The liquid may be guided by the stepped portion, which itself has a stepped portion.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, thereby making the rotary operation heavy or giving a click feeling.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has a pressing operation part 303 arranged in a ring of the rotary operation part 302, and the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302 is larger than the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302, as shown in FIG. 65(a). It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b face the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to encourage the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a firmly, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation portion 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation portion 303 may hinder the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. FIG. 66(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 66(b) is a back perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 .

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 . The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the top door frame unit 450 and the top decoration body 453 of the door frame. is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of the

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 69(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 are mounted. and internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interiors of the side window trims 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the door frame. A door having a through hole 416a that extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a extending in a shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415 .

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in translucent milky white.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 . A plurality of LEDs provided on the side window inner decorative portion decorative substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal reflector 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, upper, lower, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. It is The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the edge of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. Fig. 72(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the folded state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from above and front, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from below and front. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 arranged between a door frame top decoration 453 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. and a top right reflector 460 located in and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 .

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below; A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. there is

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side of the body portion 451a is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the lateral outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door-frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

Top center reflector 458 , top left reflector 459 , and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and door frame top right decoration substrate 457 . Through-holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the respective mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter, and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. FIG. 76 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 according to instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which connects the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame secondary board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 by the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. It is possible to prevent abnormalities from occurring in

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 , is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 , and is attached to the door frame 3 . door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded profile.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

[Electrostatic noise countermeasures]
By the way, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of control boards including the main control board 1310 are installed, and game control, effect control, Various controls such as payout control are performed. Since many electronic parts such as a CPU, which are susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise, are mounted on these control boards, how to eliminate the influence of electromagnetic wave noise in order to guarantee stable game operation without malfunction. is very important.

There are various possible sources of this electromagnetic noise, but the noise source that is unique to game machines that use game balls as game media, such as pinball game machines, and has the greatest impact is the game ball. That is, the game balls are supplied to the ball tank 552 from above each game machine by the game island facility, are played in the game machine, and then are recovered to the game island again. Static electricity is generated by friction between game balls, friction between game balls and passage walls, and the like. Electromagnetic noise is generated by the discharge from the charged game ball, which adversely affects electronic components such as a CPU.

As described above, the ball tank 552 is where the game balls that are the source of noise are supplied and concentrated the most. Next is a tank rail 553 that guides game balls from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580 . That is, it is considered that the amount of static electricity accumulated in the sphere tank 552 is the largest. Therefore, it is considered a good idea to remove the static electricity in the immediate vicinity of the sphere tank 552 . Also, in order to realize more stable game operation, in addition to measures to suppress the generation of electromagnetic noise itself due to the instantaneous discharge of static electricity, even if electromagnetic noise occurs, it will affect electronic parts. It is also desirable to take measures to eliminate the adverse effects of

In a conventional game machine, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIGS. 68 and 69), the neutralization of the game balls thrown into the ball tank 552 is described as follows: The grounding plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside through the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding fitting 782, although detailed illustration is omitted. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the static electricity can be removed." Each ground is once integrated into a power board 630 (see FIG. 95) arranged on the CR unit 6 side under the body frame 4 of the game machine so as to easily supply 24 VAC power, which is a power supply for communication. It was grounded by connecting to the earth 6000 of the island equipment via.

FIG. 202(a) is a block diagram showing a ground system of a conventional game machine showing this aspect. As shown in FIG. 202(a), conventionally, the static electricity generated in various places such as the sphere tank 552, various control boards represented by the main control board 1310, and the interface board 635 interfacing with the CR unit 6 is removed. The power supply board 630 is once aggregated and connected to the earth 6000 of the island facility through the power supply board 630 for grounding.

Since the power board 630 is generally heavy, it is often arranged at the bottom of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to concentrate on the ground power supply board 630, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank 552, the payout device 580, etc. on the upper part of the gaming machine toward the power supply board 630 below. By routing the ground wire in this way, there is a possibility that electromagnetic wave noise may be transmitted to various control boards located along the way, resulting in an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is concentrated on the power supply board 630, if any problem occurs in the power supply board 630, the ground will be affected. I was afraid to give Furthermore, when the grounding point of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, the grounding wire aggregated by the power supply board 630 needs to be routed again from the bottom to the top for connection, which is sometimes complicated.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ball tank 552 to which the largest number of game balls are supplied and which generates the largest amount of static electricity is grounded without the power supply board 630 interposed therebetween. In addition, in order to eliminate static electricity quickly, the sphere tank 552 is made of a conductive resin (for example, a resin obtained by increasing the content of conductive filler mixed with ABS resin). The static electricity is connected directly to the ground from the sphere tank 552 instead of being connected to the ground through a tank rail or the like. A ground circuit board 559 that exerts a static elimination action is placed in close proximity to the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to accumulate, independently of the power supply board 630, and the ball tank 552 and the ground circuit board 559 are connected by a ground wire. Furthermore, the ground circuit board 559 is connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility.

FIG. 202(b) is a block diagram showing the grounding system of the game machine of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202(b), not only the sphere tank 552, but also the interface board 635 that interfaces with the CR unit 6, the power supply board 630, and other parts of the static electricity generated in various places are gathered once on the ground circuit board 559, and the ground circuit It was grounded by connecting to the earth 6000 of the island facility through the substrate 559 . In this way, the earth circuit board 559 plays a role of temporarily concentrating the static electricity generated in various places. In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635, the power supply board 630, etc., and the earth circuit board 559 are directly connected. Although the tank rail 553 for guiding the game ball is made of a transparent non-conductive resin, it may be made conductive so as to be integrated with the ball tank 552 so as to have conductivity. In this case, it is also possible to provide conductivity by providing a metal plate inside, as has been done conventionally. It is also possible to ground the sphere guide unit 570 as well. In such a configuration, a ground path from the sphere tank 552 and a plurality of paths of the sphere guide unit 570 connected to the sphere tank 552 are connected. is formed, interference may occur between them, so it is desirable to ground at one point from an appropriate location.

Ground metal fittings can be connected to a plurality of locations such as the side surface or the rear surface of the ball tank 552 . The reason is that the supply (drop) position of game balls to the ball tank 552 varies depending on the island facilities installed on the game arcade side. It is possible to change the position to be closer accordingly. The mounting position of the ground metal fitting is appropriately selected in the ball tank 552 and mounted arbitrarily. A ground circuit board 559 that exerts a static elimination action is arranged in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to accumulate.

FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the payout base unit 550 having the earth circuit board 559 for static elimination, viewed obliquely from behind the body frame 4. FIG. 204 is a rear view of the housing case 551j housing the earth circuit board 559, seen from above, and FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 206 is an enlarged view of a main part mainly showing the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 203, the payout base 551 is transparent, and the payout base unit 550 is located on the right side of the sphere tank 552 on the upper surface of the payout base 551 extending to the left and right, and is located on the tank rail. Above the 553, a case portion 558a in which the circuit portions of the external terminal plate 558, which is made of a transparent resin case that can be visually recognized from the outside, is integrated is arranged. Both the plate back surface) and the connection portion of the external terminal plate 558 with the outside are visible from the outside. In this example, the external terminal plate 558 is a laterally long rectangular shape, and its long sides are arranged along the horizontal direction of the body frame 4 . Further, in this example, the short sides of the external terminal plate 558 are arranged along the vertical direction of the main body frame 4 , but this is not limitative. may be arranged at an angle. An external terminal plate 558 (connection portion) is arranged on the rear surface of the case portion 558a.

In addition, a thin box-shaped storage case 551j made of transparent resin whose interior is visible is arranged above the inside of the case 558a of the external terminal plate 558, and the inside of the storage case 551j is neutralized. A ground circuit board 559 for the purpose is housed with the rear surface (solder surface) facing upward. Therefore, not only the connecting portion of the external terminal plate 558, but also the rear surface of the terminal plate of the external terminal plate 558, the rear surface of the earth circuit board 559, and a connector portion described later are provided so as to be easily visible from the outside. In this example, the case is made of a transparent resin so that it can be seen from the outside. is provided so that not only the connecting portion of the external terminal plate 558 but also the back surface of the external terminal plate 558, the back surface of the earth circuit board 559, and the connector portion described later can be easily viewed from the outside. good too.
Also, if the payout base 551 is also made of a transparent resin, the rear surface (solder surface) of the external terminal plate 558 can be viewed from the inside when the game board is removed. Note that the storage case portion 551j may be formed separately or integrally with the payout base 551. As shown in FIG.

Since the ground circuit board 559 is provided at such a position, when the game machine is viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, simply removing the game board allows the payout base unit 550 and the external components included therein to be connected. A terminal plate 558 and a ground circuit board 559 can be visually recognized. At that time, the external terminal plate 558 and the ground circuit board 559 are positioned near the upper left when viewed from the front of the body frame 4, so it is necessary to open the door wide when attempting to commit fraud. , it becomes difficult to attach an illegal electrical element to the earth circuit board 559 or the like, and even if it is done, it becomes easy to discover from the outside that an illegal act has been carried out.

[Fixation Mode of Ball Tank 552]
A manner of fixing the ball tank 552 in this example will be described with reference to FIG. The sphere tank 552 is attached by screwing to the left side of the upper rear surface of the payout base 551 having transparency when viewed from the rear. In this example, mounting portions 552 a and 552 b projecting laterally are formed on both left and right sides of the upper portion of the front portion of the ball tank 552 that abuts on the mounting surface of the dispensing base 551 . The mounting portions 552a and 552b are screwed to the dispensing base 551 from the rear of the body frame 4, respectively.

In addition, the ball tank 552 has a mounting portion 552c formed by a boss protruding substantially in the center of the outer surface of the ball tank 552, and a boss portion protruding from the rear right portion of the ball tank 552 in the front-rear direction. A mounting portion 552d for the tank rail 553 and a mounting portion 552e for the ground metal fitting are provided.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the attachment portions 552c and 552d of the ball tank 552 by being screwed from below. Further, in this example, a ground metal fitting connected to one end of a ground wire 5591 (see FIG. 204) is screwed from below to the mounting portion 552e of the ball tank with a metal screw (not shown).

[Attachment mode of the ground metal fitting in the ball tank 552]
In this example, the mounting portion 552e of the grounding metal fitting of the sphere tank 552 is provided independently and exclusively for other mounting portions. It is also possible to share the mounting portion of the Examples are given below.

For example, in the case where game balls are supplied from island facilities installed on the game arcade side, and are concentrated on the left side inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the game machine 1 in FIG. , static electricity is most likely to accumulate on the left side of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In such a case, the ground metal fitting may be fastened together with the payout base 551 with metal screws on the mounting portion 552a.

Also, for example, the point where the game balls are supplied from the island equipment installed on the game arcade side is concentrated in the central portion inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view of the game machine 1 shown from the back side in FIG. In this case, static electricity is most likely to accumulate in the central portion of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In such a case, the ground metal fitting may be fastened together with the tank rail 553 from below with a metal screw to the mounting portion 552c.

Furthermore, for example, in the case where game balls are supplied from the island equipment installed on the game arcade side, and are concentrated on the right side of the ball tank 552 in the perspective view of the gaming machine 1 shown from the back side in FIG. Static electricity is most likely to accumulate on the right side of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In addition to the entry point of the game balls, the right side of the ball tank 552 tends to accumulate static electricity due to the gathering of many static-charged game balls. Furthermore, since the tank rail 553 has a ball straightening member 556 that aligns the game balls in a row so that the game balls do not overlap vertically, the game balls are likely to stay. In such a case, a metal screw may be used to fasten the ground metal fitting together with the tank rail 553 from below to the mounting portion 552d.

FIG. 204 is a perspective view of the storage case portion 551j of the dispensing base unit 550 having the earth circuit board 559 for static elimination, viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 204, the ground circuit board 559 has five connectors CN11 to CN15. More specifically, the other end of a ground wire 5591 for static elimination, one end of which is connected to a ball tank 552 made of conductive resin, is connected to the connector CN13. A plurality of bosses for ground connection may be provided on the outer peripheral surface of the sphere tank 552 so that it is possible to cope with changes in the arrangement configuration due to the increase in the number of main effect devices arranged in the lower part of the sphere tank 552. Often, in order to deal with factors that generate static electricity, it is desirable that the respective bosses for ground connection are provided in a state that they are separated from each other.

Further, the other end of the ground wire 5592 for static elimination, one end of which is connected to the body frame metal member provided on the body frame 4, is connected to the connector CN14. It is also possible to connect to the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 with a ground metal fitting for grounding, and to provide a ground connection terminal by separately providing a connector CN16 (not shown) on the ground circuit board. In this case, as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. 205, which will be described later, it may be connected in parallel to CN13 and CN14.

Also, one end of the ground wire 5593 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the connector CN15. Further, the other end of the ground wire 5595, one end of which is connected to the frame ground of the interface board 635, is connected to the connector CN11. The frame ground of the interface board 635 is electrically connected to the housing (frame) in which the CR unit 6 is housed via a predetermined wiring, and the noise current from the housing in which the CR unit 6 is housed is is connected to the ground circuit board 559 via the frame ground of the interface board 635 and the ground wire 5595 . One end of the ground wire 5594 is connected to the connector CN12. By connecting the other end of the ground wire 5594 to the ground provided in the island facility (game machine facility) where the game machine 1 is installed, the entire game machine is grounded.

205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. FIG. One end of the ground resistor ER1 is connected to one end of the connection line from the connector CN13 to which the ground line 5591 connected to the ball tank 552 is connected. One end of the ground resistor ER2 is also connected to one end of the connection line from the connector CN14 to which the ground wire 5592 connected to the body frame metal member provided on the body frame 4 is connected. That is, by electrically connecting the part where static electricity accumulates via an earth resistor ER1 (in this example, the resistance value is 510 Ω as an example), and gradually discharging the static electricity by gradually leading it to the ground of the game machine equipment. It suppresses the instantaneous discharge of static electricity.

Further, the other end of the earth resistor ER1 and the other end of the earth resistor ER2 are connected, and the stage after the connection point of the earth resistor ER1 is branched into two branches, one of which is connected to the connector CN15 (power supply board). and the other branch is connected to the connector CN12 (island facility). The rear stage of the connection point on the side of the earth resistor ER2 is connected to the connector CN11 (interface board).

Since the noise current flowing from the CR unit 6 to the interface board 635 through the housing housing the CR unit 6 is small, the ground wire 5595 is thinner than the other ground wires 5591 to 5594. Also, the connector CN11 for connecting the ground wire 5595 is smaller than other connectors (see FIG. 204).

In this way, the ground circuit board 559 having the ground resistors ER1 and ER2 is provided inside the housing case 551j, and one end of the ground resistor ER1 provided on the ground circuit board 559 is grounded to the ball tank 552. A wire is connected to the ground resistor ER1 to suppress momentary discharge of high voltage that causes electromagnetic noise. In addition, a ground wire connected to the body frame metal member of the body frame 4 is connected to one end of the ground resistor ER2 so as to suppress momentary discharge of high voltage that causes electromagnetic noise via the ground resistor ER2. ing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 205, static electricity in various places is connected at one point to the connector CN12 (island facility) at one point so that the static electricity can be released in one system. For example, it is possible to take a ground wire from the ball tank 552 and take a ground wire from the ball guide unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552 at the same time. Since static electricity is generated in two systems, one directly connected to the connector CN12 (island facility) and the other connected via the ball induction unit 570, static elimination by each path interferes with each other and grounding is not possible. may disappear.

In addition, since the static electricity generated in various places is collected once on the ground circuit board 559 arranged on the upper part of the rear surface of the main body frame 4, the static electricity is temporarily transferred to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame 4 as in the conventional art. Compared to consolidating, ground wiring can be routed more easily.

Since the ground circuit board 559 and the external terminal plate 558 are brought close to each other and arranged on the upper right side of the body frame 4 as viewed from the back side, the ground wire 5594 from the ground circuit board 559 and the ground 6000 of the island facility are connected. It becomes easy to simultaneously perform the work of connecting and connecting the output wiring from the external terminal plate 558 to the island facility, thereby improving workability.

A ground wire 5594 (see FIG. 204) is connected to the other end of the ground resistor ER1 and the ground resistor ER2 toward the game machine equipment, and the ground wire 5594 is further pulled out from the rear surface of the housing case portion 551j. The ground wire 5594 pulled out is connected to the ground provided in the game hall equipment, so that the entire game machine is grounded. Thus, the length of the ground wire 5591 connecting the ball tank 552 where static electricity tends to accumulate and the ground circuit board 559 that exerts the static elimination action is configured to be shorter than the other ground wires.

In addition, each ground line is collected on the ground circuit board 559, and the ground line 5594 pulled out from the connector CN12 (island facility) of the ground circuit board 559 is directly connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility. Can be grounded without passing through. Therefore, even if some problem occurs in the power supply board 630, it is possible to reduce the influence on the ground. Conversely, conventionally, grounding was performed through the power supply board 630, so there was a risk of affecting the operation of the power supply board 630 when a large amount of current flowed through the ground wire. Such fears can be avoided by grounding without passing through the power supply substrate 630 .

In this embodiment, earth resistors are provided between the connector CN13 (ball tank) and the connector CN12 (island facility) of the earth circuit board 559, and between the connector CN14 (body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island facility). Although ER1 and ER2 are provided, it is not always necessary to provide a ground resistor. The ground resistor is provided to prevent a sudden current flow when grounded. (equipment) and the connector CN15 (power supply board) may also be provided with a resistor having an appropriate resistance value. It is also possible to provide a ground resistor of an appropriate size in front of the connector CN12 (island facility) so that it can be used as a common resistor for grounding the static electricity generated in each part. By adjusting , it is also possible to ground with an appropriate amount of current without providing a ground resistor.

The ground circuit board 559 is housed inside the storage case portion 551j with the back surface (solder surface) of the board facing upward, and is arranged so as to be visible from the outside of the dispensing unit base 550. FIG. Therefore, even if an illegal electrical element is attached to the ground circuit board 559, it can be immediately found visually. In addition, on the lower board surface, between the connector CN13 (ball tank) and the connector CN12 (island facility) of the earth circuit board 559, and between the connector CN14 (body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island facility). Earth resistors ER1 and ER2 are provided between the respective connections, and these are also attached in a state that they can be visually recognized from the outside. In addition, in order to prepare for unforeseen circumstances such as loosening of the connector, the storage case portion 551j may be detachable from the dispensing unit base 550, and the ground circuit board 559 may be detachable from the storage case portion 551j.

In addition, the outer surface of the case portion 558a of the external terminal plate 558 is provided with hooking portions (for example, hook-shaped) for hooking the ground wire at a plurality of locations. A configuration in which the ground wire is connected to a connector may be used. In this way, it is possible to suppress the influence on the connector caused by the fluctuation of the ground wire itself due to the weight of the ground wire and the fluctuation when the ground wire comes into contact with other members, and the connection can be stabilized.

In addition, since the ball tank 552 is made of resin, as shown in FIGS. If the ball tank 552 bends and contacts the lower member, it may be grounded. A gap is formed to the extent that it is avoided. Furthermore, by providing the gap, the impact when a game ball is thrown into the ball tank 552 from the island equipment is not transmitted to the members below it.
Furthermore, in the ball tank 552, when grounding is taken from the mounting portion 552a provided on the left side and connecting it to the ground circuit board 559, the ground wire connecting the mounting portion 552a and the ground circuit board 559 is placed in this gap. It is better to configure it so that it can be passed using

Further, as shown in the perspective view of FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 1500 is positioned below the ball tank 552 when the game board 5 is fitted into the main body frame 4 and attached. Since the peripheral control unit 1500 includes an electric drive source for driving the liquid crystal display device 1600 and other movable accessories for presentation, it easily generates heat. Therefore, a flame-retardant polycarbonate resin (transparent or black) is used for the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 . By making the peripheral control board box 1520 made of resin, there is an effect that the weight can be reduced compared to the case where the peripheral control board box 1520 is made of metal.

The peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is made of polycarbonate, which is a conductive resin having a lower electrical resistance than the ABS resin forming the sphere tank 552 (by adjusting the content of the conductive filler to be high). achievable, e.g. by increasing the amount of carbon contained). That is, the electrical conductivity of the peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is higher than that of the sphere tank 552 . Note that the peripheral control board box 1520 may be made of metal. This is because the peripheral control board 1510, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise due to static electricity, is housed inside.

The peripheral control board box 1520 is also connected to the ground circuit board 559 with a ground wire (not shown) via a ground metal fitting (not shown) to the body frame metal member, and finally connected to the ground circuit board 559 by a ground wire 5592 . ing. For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to suppress electromagnetic noise generated by the discharge of static electricity, and is designed to quickly remove static electricity so as to reduce the influence of electromagnetic noise. In addition, since polycarbonate is resistant to high heat, the self-extinguishing property of polycarbonate (high temperature resistant) can prevent heat transfer from affecting the main control unit 1300 arranged below.

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the contact pressing portion contacts and presses the ball supply lever that operates in the opening direction to supply the game balls on the island facility side to the ball tank 552. is formed on the peripheral wall of the ball tank 552 . In this example, the upper edge of the peripheral wall forming the peripheral wall of the sphere tank 552 is provided with protrusions projecting outward (see the side and rear portions of the sphere tank 552 shown in FIG. 80). ). Therefore, the impact when the ball tank 552 hits the ball supply lever can be absorbed to some extent.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side. The ball stop member 557 is arranged inside a recess (not shown) formed in the dispensing base 551 and does not protrude rearward as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent accidental contact with the ball stop member 557 and hooking.

As described above, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 on the upper surface of the laterally extending portion of the dispensing base 551 when viewed from the front. The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guide unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 90).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 93(b) is a back perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the lower outer frame assembly 40 side is communicated through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 97) and The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 and payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, etc., and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. It is for performing a game that allows the user to enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstructing nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 within the game area 5a (not shown). In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) that controls the content.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A large prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted in either of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.例文帳に追加

In addition, the table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. , a side unit 2200 having two general prize winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, and a starting unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 attached to the right side of the mouth unit 2100 in front view and having one general winning mouth 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting mouth 2004, and a big winning mouth 2005, a starting mouth unit 2100 and A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided above the side unit 2200 and attached slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600; and a plurality of back effect units 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1010 is aligned with the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 are penetrated and the lower full-fill ball is formed. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
A game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and having the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface thereof.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 . In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110, is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a through hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has the same size as the game area 5a. It has

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This cutout portion 1122 is formed to match the cutout portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1010 and the cutout portion 1122 are penetrated. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and has.

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning opening through the panel relay board 3031. A sensor 3001 , a first start sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400, as shown enlarged in FIG. 99, displays a state indicator 1401 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. and a normal design indicator 1402 consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation indicator 1403 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate part 2003.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port. A first special reserved number indicator 1405 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to 2002, and a second special lottery drawn by accepting game balls B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator 1406 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result, and a second special reserved number indicator 1407 consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. and have.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot" or the like. a display 1408;

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images. ing.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box at the approximate center. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. With the liquid crystal screen facing forward, the effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c that are open on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, thereby locking the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. front unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B struck into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A large prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted either according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one is arranged on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003 . The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 on the upper right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction.

The front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1008 in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has one general prize winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002. A start port unit 2100 and a start port A side unit 2200 having two general winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 in front view, and a side unit 2200 attached on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in front view. An attacker unit 2400 having two general winning openings 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a. and a presentation unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁

The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a second start opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a large opening. A large winning opening sensor 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 is provided (see FIG. 102). In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a starting opening solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. An attacker solenoid 2405 for opening and closing the big prize opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B to the 2004 is provided.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. installed on the front of the The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the production display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and various production units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. can.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the lower side, so that the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is positioned inside the frame. to prevent intrusion into

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 which is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, and a frame which can release the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. A warp exit 2502 opened inside and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction are provided.

The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100. 1110), the center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2503 is tilted so that a portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both left and right sides are lowered forward. , and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 , the elevated part (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it will be received by the first starting port 2002 with a very high probability.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction and the upper part of the right side face in a front view are aligned with the outer periphery (the outer rail 1001 and the right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. It is mounted so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. An attacker unit 2400 is attached below the upper right side surface of the center accessory 2500 . Therefore, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B can pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, it is possible to receive the game ball B into the large winning opening 2005 which is open (open) with a high probability.

Although not shown in detail, the display effect unit 2600 is selected according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , and has a plurality of effect decorations that move and emit light, and can perform movable effects and light-emitting effects. The display effect unit 2600 can appropriately use a plurality of effect decorations to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., and by appropriately combining them, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player. As well as making it difficult for the player to get bored, the player can be entertained by various presentations, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the substrate holder 1200 below. Ejected. In addition, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. be done.

Also, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-9. back unit]
The back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 102).

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600; A back effect unit 3100 is provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and a liquid crystal mounting portion. A notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached is provided from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side of the portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

The panel relay board 3031 includes the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the starting opening solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the second It is for relaying the connection with the starting point sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003 .

Although not shown in detail, the back effect unit 3100 is drawn according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , and has a plurality of effect decorations that move and emit light, and can perform movable effects and light-emitting effects. The back effect unit 3100 can appropriately use a plurality of effect decorations to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, and the like, and by appropriately combining them, various pattern effects can be presented to the player. As well as making it difficult for the player to get bored, the player can be entertained by various presentations, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). A peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail in FIG. 102, but as shown in FIG. The magnetic sensor 3003, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the starting opening solenoid 2404, and the attacker solenoid 2405 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 3031. good too. A detailed description of the control configuration will be given later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 153. FIG.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor containing a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., and a main control MPU 1310a as an input/output device (I/O device). A main control I/O port, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a RAM built in the main control MPU and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM clear switch. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, and a second start opening that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. An opening sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B passing through the gate section 2003, and a game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 Detection signals from the big winning opening sensor 2403 that detects B, and the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a (hereinafter referred to as a magnetic detection sensor 4024), etc. are sent to the main control I /O port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs control signals from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting drive signals to the starter solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405. , from the main control I / O port to the function display unit 1400 status indicator 1401, normal symbol indicator 1402, normal pending indicator 1403, first special symbol indicator 1404, first special pending number indicator 1405, second special A drive signal is output to the symbol display 1406, the second special reservation number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, the general winning hole sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so that the first starting hole sensor 3002 and the second starting hole sensor 2402 , and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the big winning hole sensor 2403 . On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. In addition, the main control MPU, which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This blackout warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball tank 552 and a tank rail during maintenance. 553, a ball guide unit 570, and a ball extraction switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) to start the ball extraction operation.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM as well as functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is inputted to the payout control input circuit and inputted to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, an abnormality has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In addition, the power board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decoration board of the game board 5. , game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for sending to the drive solenoid or for outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc., and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc. provided in the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board. to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , and outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 that indicates that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and produces various effects from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects that are in tune with the music flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

Also, in the vibration speaker 354, as with other speakers, the sound source IC is used to extract sound information that changes to vibration from the sound ROM based on the control data from the peripheral control MPU, and is used in combination with the push button effect. be done. For example, when the player presses the effect operation unit 301 with the sound of "Press the button!" At this time, the vibration of the vibration speaker is transmitted to the effect operation unit 301 by using the sound information that changes to the vibration of the vibration speaker, and using the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. At this time, the player feels as if the effect operation section 301 has trembled.

Here, the purpose of the vibration speaker 354 is to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, in order to resonate, it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the method of attachment. In such a case, there are cases where vibration cannot be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In this embodiment, in order to absorb the variation in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency, but is input as a range of frequencies. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a sine wave of 40 Hz±2 Hz, and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (swept) in units of 1 Hz each cycle eight times per second. This is repeated intermittently by sweeping input for 1 second and then inputting again after 1 second.

Regarding the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, a series of processes in the RAM clear process as shown in steps S16 to S36 in the flowchart of FIG. I try to do it as
In the gaming machine described in this embodiment, the information stored by the main control board 1310 and the information stored by the payout control board 633 are stored in the same manner when the power is cut off.
Specifically, a capacitor that stores charge during power supply is connected to a power supply terminal for the RAM built in the CPU, and power is supplied by the charge stored in the capacitor when the power is cut off.

Here, when the gaming machine is shipped, there is a case where the RAM is in an unstable state because the electricity is not sufficiently supplied and the capacitor is not charged. Then, if the power is supplied with no charge stored in the capacitor, the checksum value and the backup flag value recorded when the power is turned off do not exist as normal values, so the RAM is abnormal. is determined. In that case, the CPU clears the entire area of the RAM and transmits a RAM clear notification command to the sub-control board as a command relating to the power-on state. Upon receiving the RAM clearing notification sound command, the sub-control board repeats the RAM clearing notification for a predetermined period of time, for example, 90 seconds.

In this embodiment, this RAM clear notification period is used to check the operation of the vibration speaker.
When the push button is operated when the CPU of the sub-control board is in the RAM clear notification state, as described above, a sine wave signal of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz (38 Hz to 42 Hz in 1 Hz units for each cycle , and is changed (swept) eight times per second. This is intermittently performed by sweeping input for 1 second and then inputting again after 1 second, and is controlled to input to the vibration speaker for a predetermined period.

In the first place, information is stored in the RAM as collateral in the event of a temporary power outage when the player is in an advantageous state, such as during a big win or during probability fluctuations. On the other hand, when the probability fluctuating state occurs just before the store closes, or when a situation occurs in which the player has to stop playing in the probability fluctuating state due to the convenience of the player, in order to maintain fairness among players, A RAM clear function is provided as a function to initialize the state. By pressing the RAM clear button when the power is supplied, the series of processing in the RAM clear described above is executed even when it is determined that the RAM clear button has been pressed. Therefore, even if the operation of the vibration speaker is confirmed during the RAM clear notification period, the state of the sub-control board suddenly shifts to the operation confirmation state of the vibration speaker unless the RAM is intentionally cleared during normal business hours. never.

The sound source IC (or built-in IC) of the gaming machine described in this embodiment has six sound output terminals to which speakers can be connected. is output through the audio output terminal to which is connected.
Here, the audio output terminal can be selectively set, and for the vibration speaker, one of the multiple audio output terminals is set as an audio output terminal dedicated to the vibration speaker. ing.

In addition, since the audio signal in the normal speaker and the vibration signal in the vibration speaker have the same form, a common sound source IC can be used for signal generation. However, since their functions and purposes are different, it is preferable to separate the audio output terminal used for audio from the audio output terminal used as a vibration source in order to avoid confusion between the two. By setting in this way, for example, when it is desired to turn down the volume uniformly all at once, it is possible to collectively manage volume adjustment using a main volume or the like, which will be described later. It is possible to separately control the sound and the vibration so that the control can be performed without narrowing down the effects of the vibration speaker generated at the same timing.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It diagnoses whether or not its own system is running out of control by using it together with WDT.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. k) Bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the performance drive board of the game board 5, are multiple serial input commands different from the display commands. This is performed by the output port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

The effect driving board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command to the LED of each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, or based on the received game board side lighting blinking command A lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 .

In addition, the performance drive board transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, each drive motor provided on the game board 5, and the like. output to

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively.

[7. Game content]
Game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are rotated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 . is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The more the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball B is attached to the obstacle nail. By coming into contact with , the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 to the left of the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). , the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and moves forward from either the center top in the left-right direction or the valleys on the left and right sides of the top. released. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the top part of the center of the stage 2503, the top part is positioned directly above the first start opening 2002, so it is accepted by the first start opening 2002 with a high probability. . When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

When the game ball B rolling on the stage 2503 is released into the game area 5a from the valleys on the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a is the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100, the general winning hole 2001 of the starting hole unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize gate 2001, etc.

By the way, if the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 pulls it toward the center in the left-right direction. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the first starting opening 2002 of the opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, and the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed hitting). , is released to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 through the right side of the center accessory 2500 . This portion is provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the closed second start opening. 2004 will be in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 will be possible. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, to the upper tray 201. paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal fluctuation time is, the more the game ball B that draws the "normal hit" in the gate section 2003 is accepted by the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received by the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", A lottery will be held for special lottery results that generate "middle hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability variation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit".Then, the special lottery result that was drawn is Predetermined time (for example, 0.1 ~ 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time) suggested to the player.In addition, the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 lottery The special lottery results include "loss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "variable (probability change) hit", "time saving (time reduction) hit", " There are "probable short time hit", "probable short time hit", etc.

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is sent from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, a lot of the game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. can.

When the special lottery result is a "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "big hit", after the big winning hole 2005 becomes an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or to the big winning hole 2005 Acceptance of a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) to make the game ball B unacceptable in a closed state. is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "jackpot", after the jackpot game is over, the probability that the special lottery result such as "jackpot" will be drawn ("variable hit") is changed, and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Reserved. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without withholding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than ``losing'', after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) is generated according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until display is different), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation, and the operation button elevation drive motor By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, and the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, etc. , movable effects, etc., can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation portion 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 is caused to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the bulging portion of the present invention, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment are the storage plates of the present invention, and the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of the unit cover unit 310 are the decorative body of the present invention, and the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment is the first decorative portion of the present embodiment. The plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the above is the second decorative portion of the present invention, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 in the present embodiment are the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention, and the present The effect operation ring decoration board 352, the central button decoration board 376, and the peripheral button decoration board 377 in the embodiment respectively correspond to the operating section light emitting means of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 that closes the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, below the door window 101a. A tray unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing a liquid is protruding forward, and the tray unit 200 has a length of about 1/2 of the total width of the door frame base 101 at the front end. is provided with a production operation section cover unit 310 protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101, and a central pressing operation section 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation section 303a are arranged concentrically on the upper surface of the production operation section cover unit 310. A portion 303b and a rotation operation portion 302 are provided. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation part cover unit 310 having the effect operation part 301 attached to the upper surface is installed below the door window 101a through which the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized. Since the plate unit 200 (performance operation part cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1, it can strongly attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. The power can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play. In addition, since the front end of the production operation part cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is largely projected forward below the door frame 3, the production operation part cover unit 310 can be moved forward from the front end of the upper tray 201.例文帳に追加In addition, the length of the effect operation section cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his/her hand on the upper plate 201, the parts of the whole performance operation part cover unit 310 that are hidden by the player's hand are reduced. Therefore, when the effect operation section cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-emitting decorated by the plate center upper decorative board 314 and the plate center lower decorative board 316, the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312 is given to the player. It is possible to make it easy for the player to notice this, to avoid the player from feeling lost, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect operation section cover unit 310 is largely protruded forward below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is opened. is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 can be light-emitting-decorated by the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 according to the game state, or the effect operation can be performed. When the effect operation section 301 is decorated with light emission by the ring decoration board 352, the central button decoration board 376, and the peripheral button decoration board 377, the light illuminates the player from below, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation section 301 are illuminated. , the player's line of sight can be directed toward the lower unit front cover 312 and the effect operation section 301, and by directing the player's line of sight downward, the game area 5a provided in the front can be turned. can be kept away from the player's field of view to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start port 2004 and the big winning port 2005 open and close, etc. Furthermore, by decorating the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation part 301 with light emission, the player is directed downward in the game area 5a. By changing the body, etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, amuse the player, and make the player think that something good will happen. Thus, it is possible to heighten expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the unit front cover 312 is decorated with light according to the game state to attract the player's attention, and the effect in the game area 5a can be changed to surprise the player. , the luminous decoration of the unit front cover 312 can suggest to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state (“jackpot game”) in which the player has an advantage). As a result, a premium feeling can be given to the luminous decoration of the unit front cover 312, so that the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the unit front cover 312 is decorated with luminescence, thereby making the player happy. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the unit front cover 312 protrudes greatly forward, when the player tries to look at the whole unit front cover 312, the player moves away from the pachinko machine 1, so that the entire gaming machine including the game area is moved. becomes easier to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if the game has been put aside for a while, and the player can be relaxed to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since the effect operation part cover unit 310 projecting greatly forward is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation part cover unit 310 is emphasized and the player's interest is strongly attracted. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by increasing the appeal to the player. In addition, since the effect operation section cover unit 310 protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a. It is possible to easily operate the handle 182 for the purpose and to handle the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201, thereby making it difficult for the player to be stressed and suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 are arranged so that the semicircular cross section bulges outward. Since it extends in a semicircular shape, half of a cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, so that it is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression. It is possible to make the player play the game in a calm mood, to make the player concentrate on the game and to suppress the decline in interest, and to prevent the player from being injured even if the player touches it at first glance. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is safe, and to make the player feel at ease, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the plate unit 200 bulging forward below the door window 101a is provided by simultaneously decorating the performance operation part cover unit 310 and the performance operation part 301 protruding from the upper surface of the performance operation part cover unit 310 with light. Since the whole can be luminous decoration, the dish unit 200 can be made conspicuous and strongly attract the player's interest, and the whole luminous decoration does not bring any good to the player. At the same time, the player's interest can be directed to the performance operation unit 301 to prompt the operation, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b are formed in a half-doughnut shape, the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 and the plate center lower decoration substrate 316 are formed in accordance with the game state. When the entire decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are light-emitting, the player can see the light-emitting decoration like an annular fluorescent lamp, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the luminous decoration is made, for example, if the luminous decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the luminous effect as if the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It can surprise you and make you think that something good is going to happen. The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction that the light at 312b is rotating. Alternatively, the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, which are arranged vertically, are alternately decorated with light, so that the player can see a lighting effect in which light moves up and down. At the same time, the vertically moving light can prompt the player to press the peripheral pressing portion 303b or the central pressing portion 303a. Therefore, the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower center plate decoration 312b are appropriately illuminated to prompt the player to rotate the rotary operation unit 302 or press the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, the player can be caused to operate the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 accurately, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 extends forward from the side of the door window 101a (outside of the right side). Three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction of the side window interior decoration member 412 in a cylindrical shape are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction on the protruding flat plate-shaped door frame right side unit 410. A window 410a is formed, and in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island equipment) through the interior decoration portion 410b. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. After that, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. , the game can be played in the game area 5a, the player can enjoy the game, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

At this time, in the door frame 3, the left side of which is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 by the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126, the door window 101a Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outer side far from the axis of the hinge, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b are visible. can block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a, making it difficult for other players to see By making it difficult to receive the feeling, other players can play without worrying about it. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and changes to a predetermined game state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 cause the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light, and the side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light. Visibility through the side window 410a is changed by making the inside 410a bright. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light can be emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, making the side window interior decoration portions 410b dazzling and making it difficult to visually recognize the opposite side from between them. In addition, it is possible to direct the player's line of sight to the side window interior decoration part 410b by the light emission of the side window interior decoration part 410b, so that the player's interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a is diminished and the side window is viewed. The visibility through 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to look into the inside of the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

More specifically, when the game state is such that, for example, the player is in a game state (scene) that suggests the arrival of an advantageous chance, the three side window inner decorative portions 410b are caused to emit light, and the glare of the side window interior decoration portions 410b causes the side windows to emit light. Reduce visibility through window 410a. This makes it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the other players pay attention to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Because it is possible to avoid this, other players are worried about being noticed and can not concentrate on the game, so they feel uncomfortable, and they feel that they have lost money because they are induced to make mistakes. can be prevented, the game can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Therefore, when the player is in a game state such as when a chance arrives, other players can be prevented from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a. It is possible to entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

In addition, since the three side window interior decorative portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction in the side window 410a, the angle of viewing the side window 410a from the side changes. However, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b do not appear to overlap each other, when the side window interior decoration portions 410b are not illuminated, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the side window 410a can be viewed on the opposite side. (within the game area 5a), and a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily found without it.

In addition, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged with an interval in the vertical direction, when the side window interior decoration portions 410b of a certain height are illuminated, a portion of the same height in the game area 5a is displayed. can be made difficult for other players to see through the side window 410a. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction within the game area 5a, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance or the like. Therefore, when the player is in a game state such as when a chance arrives, other players can be prevented from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a. It is possible to entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

Furthermore, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending long forward is provided with the side window 410a penetrating to the left and right, the three side window interior decorative portions 410b are turned off to open the side window 410a. In a state in which the visibility through the pachinko machine 1 is secured, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the island equipment can be seen without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to easily discover that a fraudulent act is being performed in the game area 5a from the end of the game hall, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outside of the left and right sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3, which is farther from the left side that is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the body frame 4.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened to carry out work such as maintenance or replacement of the game board 5, the door frame 3 can be prevented from becoming a hindrance by opening the door frame 3 wide, thereby preventing deterioration of workability. can do.

In addition, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light according to the game state, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs (so-called The side window interior decorative portion 410b may be illuminated or extinguished depending on the expected value). More specifically, for example, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win developing effect, etc., when the expected value is low, the decorative portion 410b inside the side window is illuminated to make it difficult for other players to look into the game, thereby generating an advantageous game state. It is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere with other players when the game is not played (at the time of "losing"), and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the side window interior decoration part 410b is not illuminated or extinguished, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state ("big win") even in a state where it is easy for other players to peep. ), it is possible to suppress the decline in interest without creating an awkward atmosphere, and to create an atmosphere in which the other players are cheering, thereby increasing the interest in the game of the player. It can make the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player is advantageous occurs (so-called (expected value), the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light in order (for example, from bottom to top, from top to bottom, from the center to both upper and lower sides, etc.), or among the three side window interior decoration portions 410b. A specific side window interior decorative portion 410b may be illuminated. More specifically, for example, during the execution of reach production, reach development production, etc., the higher the expected value, the more the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are caused to emit light in order from the bottom or in order from the top. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to peek at the game, to suggest an expected value, to increase the player's expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

The three side window interior decoration portions 410b as described above emit light (lighting) and light off, and there are also differences in flashing patterns, light emission colors, and changes in light emission colors (for example, from cold blue to hot). It may be a change to a feeling of red, a change to blue-yellow-red like a traffic signal, etc.), or a change in brightness (luminance), etc., and the same effects as above can be achieved. The decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration parts 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to strongly attract the attention of the players.

For this reason, conversely, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win developing effect, etc., depending on whether or not the three side window inner decorative portions 410b emit light and the light emitting mode such as the light emitting pattern, the game state is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to suggest the degree (expected value) of the possibility of occurrence of the - It is possible to make the player's heart beat faster, heighten the player's sense of expectation, and suppress a decline in interest.

Also, the three side window interior decoration parts 410b may be arbitrarily turned on or off by operating the effect operation part 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3. . As a result, for example, in the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win developing effect, etc., when the possibility (so-called expected value) of the occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player is low, the effect operation is performed. By operating the part 301 to make the side window interior decoration part 410b emit light, it is possible to prevent other players from peeking at it, so when an advantageous game state does not occur (when "losing") In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling embarrassed by being watched by other players, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous game state is high (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is operated so that the side window interior decoration part 410b does not emit light. (or turn off the side window interior decoration part 410b), even if other players look into the game, an advantageous game state is generated, thereby preventing an awkward atmosphere and reducing interest. In addition to being able to suppress, it is possible to create an atmosphere as if the other players are cheering for each other.

In addition, by operating the effect operation unit 301, it is also possible to set the timing, light emission mode, etc., for the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light. As a result, in the preset default state, the timing peculiar to the player who does not want to be peeped by other players is not set. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the effect operation unit 301, the above-described effects can be reliably achieved, and the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball removal lever 593 is lowered (locked) to disable the ball removal movable piece 592 from rotating and the ball removal is disabled. When the passage 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B that has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is disabled by the ball removal movable piece 592 from flowing into the ball removal passage 580b. , continue to flow downstream of the dispensing passage 580a, and can be sent to the dispensing blade 589 via the dispensing passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted (unlocked) to put the ball extraction movable piece 592 in a rotatable state (second state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from upstream moves to the payout passage. Without flowing to the downstream side of 580a, it passes over the ball removal movable piece 592 and flows to the ball removal passage 580b, and can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 on the island equipment side via the ball removal passage 580b. can. Since the payout blade 589 is provided on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, in a normal state, the ball pullout lever 593 prevents the ball pullout movable piece 592 from rotating (first state). , on the upstream side of the payout blade 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a string of beads.

When the payout vane 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout vane 589 flows downstream, and the game ball B is guided toward the payout vane 589 side by the ball extraction movable piece 592. Since the game ball B is paid out one by one at the payout blade 589, the flow speed of the game ball B on the upstream side from the payout blade 589 becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B hits. The force acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592 due to contact is relatively weak, and the opposite side of the part of the ball extraction movable piece 592 that contacts the game ball B is near the center of the ball extraction passage 580b. is not caught between the wall surface of the ball extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball extraction movable piece 592 is not damaged. As a result, it is possible to reduce damage to the movable ball piece 592 during the game, so that the game is interrupted due to the damage to the movable ball piece 592 and the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a during replacement or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5), the ball removal lever 593 is lifted so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated. In the state (second state), the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, flows down to the ball extraction passage 580b side beyond the ball extraction movable piece 592. Become. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly. In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 . For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the left side of the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed opens and closes around the axis extending vertically. The main body frame 4 is attached so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 (axis center) on the left side of the main body frame 4 are closed. ), the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 face each other and extend parallel to each other when the door frame 3 is attached so as to be openable and closable (rotable with a hinge) at the center. The payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. on the side of the body frame 4 are connected to the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, etc. on the side of the door frame 3. The connection cable 503 extends from a portion away from the axis of the cable attachment recess 501h recessed rearward on the front surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 toward the axis, and is attached in the cable attachment recess 501h. 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3. After being held by the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502 extending in parallel with the rear surface of the door frame 3, the connecting cable guide member 502 further extends to the vicinity of the axis, then folds back and extends in the direction away from the axis, The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side are held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 in the door frame 3. It is connected to the.

Then, when the door frame 3 closing (closed) the front side of the body frame 4 is hinge-rotated around the axis on the left side so as to be opened from the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 is pushed to the body. Since the portion of the connection cable 503 extending from the door frame 3 moves away from the main body frame 4 because it moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open, As the connection cable 503 is deformed, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates (turns) about the mounting shaft 502 c away from the axis so that the connection cable guide member 502 is tilted with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 . In this manner, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the leading end side of the connection cable guide member 502 near the axis protrudes into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Since the connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are unlikely to become an obstacle.

In other words, since the connection cable guide member 502 extends from the rotatably attached mounting shaft 502c toward the shaft core, the base end of the guide member can be extended like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the folding back portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the door frame upper hinge pin 122 for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position is close to the lower hinge pin 126, and the folded back portion of the connection cable 503 can be set to a position where it is difficult to get in the way.

On the other hand, when closing the door frame 3 that is open with respect to the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves closer to the front surface of the body frame 4. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 moves in the opposite direction to the above, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 can be moved without being caught between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3. can be closed. Therefore, when performing maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, and the maintenance can be performed smoothly, and the maintenance can be interrupted for maintenance. It is possible to reduce the increase in the interruption time of the game being played, and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the connection cable 503, which extends from the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core and is folded back to extend in a direction away from the shaft core, is placed at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Since it is held on the door frame 3 side by the cable holder 103a, the rotation angle of the connection cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a around the axis. Since the tangent line passing through the center of the mounting shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is less than or equal to the angle at which it intersects the rear surface of the door frame 3, the longitudinal axis along which the connection cable guide member 502 extends to the posterior surface of the . Further, on the side of the door frame 3 , the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 . 3, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the axial core side.

For these reasons, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state. It is possible to prevent an abnormality such as disconnection of the connection cable 503 due to contact of the tip of the member 502 with the door frame 3 . Therefore, when an abnormality such as opening and closing the door frame 3 for maintenance occurs during the game, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance work, and the maintenance can be performed. The game can be played smoothly, the increase in the game interruption time can be reduced, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Also, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 when closed (closer to the axis than the cable holder 103a) ), and can press the connection cable 503 toward the body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached by abutting it (a position closer to the axis center than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103). a portion projecting rearward on the side). As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip side of the open connection cable guide member 502 via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Also, a tangent line that passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and is in contact with a circle centered on the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and passes through the pressing portion, and the front surface of the main body frame 4. The crossing angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less. 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the frame pieces 502b are provided on the two long sides of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat plate-shaped guide body 502a is increased, making it difficult to bend. In addition, the connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, so that the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized reliably.

Further, as described above, since the connection cable guide member 502 has increased rigidity, even if the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 made up of many electric wires, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated around the mounting shaft 502c, the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good state, and more electric wires can be guided. Therefore, the electrical connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be concentrated in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

In addition, with the connection cable 503 placed between the pair of frame pieces 502b of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 is passed through the through-holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503 and connected to the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the work of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 can be easily performed. be able to. In addition, by holding the connection cable 503 with the binding band 504 passed through the through hole 502d of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from coming off the guide member 502. The connection cable 503 can be held securely, and the connection cable 503 is removed from the connection cable guide member 502 so that the connection cable 503 is not caught between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed. It is possible to avoid the above-described operation and effect.

Further, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is moved to the outer frame lower side constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylindrical portion 43a. Since the space between the port member 47 and the connecting tube portion 43a in the assembly 40 (the inner space 40a of the curtain plate) is communicated with the main body frame speaker by the space inside the speaker unit 620a and the space on the side of the outer frame 2. Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of the 622 can be sufficiently secured, a heavy bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the player is entertained by the sound of the heavy bass sound, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. can be done. Therefore, by providing the cable attachment recess 501h for attaching the connection cable guide member 502 to the main body frame 4, even if the volume inside the speaker unit 620a is reduced, the main body frame speaker 622 can output deep bass sound. Therefore, the body frame 4 can be provided with the cable attachment recess 501h recessed rearward below the body frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached to the body frame 4 side to achieve the above-described effects. In addition, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is mounted inside the cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward in the body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h, so that the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 can be prevented. The door frame 3 can be reliably closed by avoiding it.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the body in the body frame 4 passes through the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion opening 501b of the frame base 501 can be visually recognized from the front (player side), and the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed below the door window 101a. The front end of the port member 47 is open in the vicinity of the right end in the longitudinal direction (lateral direction) of the front panel front member 42 of the lower outer frame assembly 40, and a port is provided at the lower portion of the front surface of the door frame 3. A speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened in the vicinity of the left end on the side opposite to the member 47 in the left-right direction. The speaker port 211b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4, and the speaker unit 620a covering the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of (the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 ) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 . In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620a is driven, sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 are output from the speaker mounting portion of the speaker cover 621. 621a and the speaker port 211b of the door frame 3 are radiated to the player side. On the other hand, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting tubular portion 43a into the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. , and emitted forward from the port member 47 toward the player side. At this time, since the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (enclosure 624) is composed of the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the enclosure 624 The volume can be increased as much as possible, and a sound with extended bass range can be output forward from the body frame speaker 622 . In addition, since the connecting tube portion 43a of the panel rear member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) of the frame, the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a) are connected to the enclosure 624. ) in the depth direction (front-rear direction) at the connection portion with the speaker unit 620a. Attenuation of sound from the space toward the interior space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 can be reduced as much as possible. Further, since the port member 47 is cylindrical on the side of the outer frame 2, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the low frequency range can be amplified and the phase can be reversed. 47 can output a sound in which the bass is amplified. The sound forwardly output from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound forwardly output from the port member 47 interfere with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1 and are combined to increase the volume. , the player can be made to listen to richer bass sounds, and the player can enjoy sounds such as voices, music, sound effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, the port member 47 inverts the phase of the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear and radiates it forward (constituting a so-called bass reflex type speaker). When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 overlaps the sound output forward from the port member 47, the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the volume of the sound increases because the phases are the same. Compared to using a passive radiator, it is possible to increase the sound output with a simple configuration.

Furthermore, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are arranged below the game board insertion slot 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the vertical dimension of them can be increased. enclosure 624 can be increased in volume. More specifically, in general, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the eyes of the player is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a in which games are played is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For this reason, since it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the outer frame lower assembly 40 constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 and the game board insertion opening 501b in the main body frame 4 Therefore, by increasing the vertical dimensions of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a sound with a richer bass tone, to entertain the player with the sound, and to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Further, since the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, simply by closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c abuts against the connecting tube portion 43a. In addition, since sliding resistance is not generated between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, the opening/closing operation of the body frame 4 does not become heavy. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in workability during maintenance or the like.

Furthermore, since the seal member 48 seals the space between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, it is possible to prevent sound leakage in the enclosure 624 between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the effects described above.

In addition, since part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so that the game board is relatively small. The game board 5 with a wider game area 5a can be provided by enlarging the insertion opening 501b, and the wide game area 5a can entertain the players more, and the wide game area 5a can be opened through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by being visible, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the lower portion of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end in the horizontal direction, and the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end on the opposite side. Therefore, since the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 forward and the sound output forward from the port member 47 2 (pachinko machine 1) at a certain distance in front of it, they interfere with each other. You can hear rich bass sound.

In addition, as described above, since the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 to the front is amplified by interference near the player, other players far from the pachinko machine 1 The player will receive unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound suggesting the arrival of a chance is output, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 hears a sound with a high volume and a rich bass sound, thereby heightening expectations for the game. can be made On the other hand, since it is difficult for players playing other pachinko machines to hear the sound from the pachinko machine 1, it is difficult for them to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 suggests the arrival of a chance. This makes it possible to reduce other players' peeking into the pachinko machine 1, and the peeping makes the players playing with the pachinko machine 1 feel uncomfortable and reduces their interest. can be suppressed.

Further, since the position of the connecting tube portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is set at the center of the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the side of the body frame 4 connected to the connecting tube portion 43a Since the connection portion 621c of the main body frame 4, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the body frame 4, another member is arranged in a space secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a across the center in the horizontal direction, or the other member is enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by means of other members, and the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the attention of the players.

Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the left-right direction in between, the game ball B is discharged to the outside in the space. A base unit 620b equipped with a ball ejection guiding portion 627, a discharged ball receiving portion 628, and the like, and a ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. , a power supply board 630 for controlling the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with these reliably. .

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the central pressing operation portion protruding upward from the upper surface of the plate unit 200 protruding forward in front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is played. 303a, an annular peripheral pressing operation portion 303b having a diameter surrounding the outer periphery of the central pressing operation portion 303a and having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an annular rotating operation portion surrounding the outer periphery of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. 302 is arranged in an inclined state so that the front end side of the upper surface is lowered, so that the upper surfaces of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1. Since the head (face) faces a certain direction, the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotating operation portion 302 are made easy to see, and the three large operation portions (pressing operation portions) arranged concentrically. The operation part 303 and the rotation operation part 302) can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player. The provision of the operation part can be recognized at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines to strongly attract the player's interest. In addition, since the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotating operating portion 302 are conspicuous, a game in which the player operates the central pressing operating portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b, and the rotating operating portion 302 The expectation for the player participation type performance can be heightened, and the game is advanced so as to enter a game state in which the player participation type performance is executed (here, many game balls B are driven into the game area 5a. ), and when the player participatory performance is executed, it is possible to make the player participate in the performance, and to make the player enjoy the player participatory performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, depending on the game state, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are moved to a retracted position (lowered position) slightly protruding from the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 by an elevation mechanism including the operation button elevation drive motor 367 and the like. ) and a protruded position (raised position) that protrudes upward from the retracted position, and at the retracted position, the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 presses the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b. With the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b in the retracted position, the player can clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b cannot be accepted. As a result, the central pressing operation portion 303a can be reliably pressed, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, in the state of the retracted position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is in a state in which it cannot be pressed. Therefore, there is an erroneous operation such as pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a when rotating the rotating operation portion 302, or rotating the rotating operation portion 302 when pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a. can be made difficult to occur, the player's participatory performance can be surely enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

By moving to the projecting position, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b protrude greatly upward on the upper surface of the plate unit 200. 303b can be made conspicuous, a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be imparted to the pressing operations of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the player think that it is not possible. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to participate in the player-participation-type performance by pressing the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b and the central pressing-operation part 303a, and it is possible to make the player-participation type performance enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

In this projecting position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b, and the rotation operating portion 302 are arranged concentrically. , when the central pressing operation portion 303a must be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or both the central pressing portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b are pressed, or When it is necessary to press the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, the central pressing operating portion 303a is pressed, or both the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b are pressed. The operating portion 302 may be rotated, or the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b may be pressed when the rotary operating portion 302 needs to be rotated. can be induced to press the As a result, when performing a pressing operation or a rotating operation, the player can perform the pressing operation or the rotating operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed and the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated. A sense of tension can be imparted to the pressing operation and the rotating operation, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the player-participation type performance of performing the pressing operation and the rotating operation. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game of the player.

In addition, it is provided with notification means such as a vibration speaker 354 and a performance display device 1600, and in a player participation type performance, the player can perform a central pressing operation in the state of the projecting position where the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is possible. If only the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b is pressed when the portion 303a should be pressed, the notification means notifies that the center pressing portion 303a will be pressed, and the pressing operation is restarted. The central pressing operation part 303a can be reliably pressed, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type performance. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted, and to make the player enjoy the player-participation-type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, when the player believes that he/she is pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a correctly, the reaction (change) of the player participation type performance is performed despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a. is different from what is desired, and the player may be under the illusion that the center depressing operation section 303a is out of order, which may reduce the interest of the player. On the other hand, as described above, since the error of the pressing operation is notified by the notification means, the player's assumption can be corrected, and the central pressing operation portion 303a is correctly pressed to allow the player to participate. You can enjoy the type production.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is played, an upper tray 201 and a lower tray for storing the game balls B that bulge forward and are used for playing a game are provided. 202, an annular rotating operation part 302 that is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically and has an outer peripheral side surface, an upper surface, and an inner peripheral side exposed to the outside; A pressing operating portion 303 consisting of a central pressing operating portion 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b is arranged in the center pressing operating portion 303a, and a rotating operating portion 302 is arranged according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area 5a. The peripheral control board 1510 executes a player-participation-type effect such as rotating the , or pressing the pressing operation portion 303 . Then, when the player participation type production is executed, the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303, so that Since the effect changes, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed. When rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the player touches and operates any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside. Since it is possible to rotate by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when the rotation operation is performed by touching the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface in one direction with the player's hand. can. Therefore, even when a player-participating effect is executed that requests the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate at high speed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed as described above. The effect can be enjoyed for the player, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently operated to rotate, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early. The player's participatory performance in which the operation unit 302 is rotated can be continuously entertained, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Further, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or rotated with a light force, the player can be requested to perform various rotation operations, To make it possible to request a different rotation operation for each, to present a wider variety and variety of player-participation type performances to the player, to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and to suppress the decline in interest. can be done.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface of the operation cover (consisting of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337) touched and rotated by the player is rotatably attached to the plate unit 200. Since the plate unit 200 protrudes in an arc outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) from the rotation base 332 that is attached to the plate unit 200, even if the rotation operation is performed by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface, the plate unit 200 does not become an obstacle. , the rotary operation unit 302 can be easily rotated, and since the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated from a direction other than right beside the rotary operation unit 302 (perpendicular to the rotation axis). Since it becomes easier to touch the outer peripheral side surface, the player can operate the rotating operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotating operation unit 302 when rotating the rotating operation unit 302 . Operability can be improved. Therefore, since the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated by rubbing the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated at a faster speed in the player participation type performance. , the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the diameter of the rotary operation portion 302 is increased, compared with a rotary operation portion having a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine, it is easier to perform a rotation operation at a minute rotation angle, and a rotation operation can be easily performed. Since it is possible to increase the movement of the player at the time of , it is possible to make the player feel that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated. It is possible to entertain the rotation operation of 302 and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the rotary operation unit 302 is formed into a ring shape, and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the upper surface can be rotated in addition to the outer peripheral side surface. Since it is possible to rotate by touching a portion according to the player's preference and situation, such as the inner peripheral side surface, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved. It is possible to make the audience participation type performance more enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotary operation portion 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotary operation, even if the pressing operation portion 303 is provided in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302, the pressing operation portion 303 can be pressed. The operation part 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation are fully enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest. can be made

Furthermore, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotary operation. The appearance of the portion 302 can be completely different from that of an automobile steering wheel, an airplane control stick, or the like. As a result, for example, if the rotary operation unit is shaped like a steering wheel of an automobile, the moment the player sees the rotary operation unit, the player may assume that the rotary operation unit is to be operated by grasping the rotary operation unit. Therefore, when a player-participation type effect that requires a variety of rotation operations is executed, it is not possible to perform a rotation operation that is different from the handle operation, and the player-participation type effect cannot be performed. There is a risk that the player will not be able to enjoy the game and will lose interest in the game. However, in this embodiment, the external appearance of the rotary operation unit 302 is completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, or the like. can be wiped out, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated at will by the player, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even when the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral side surface and upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 are exposed to the outside. Therefore, the protruding pressing operation part 303 does not become an obstacle, the rotation operation part 302 can be comfortably rotated, and the enjoyment of the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 201 for storing the game balls B for expanding forward and performing the game are located in front and below the game area 5a where the game is played on the game board 5. 202 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, an annular rotating operation part 302 having a rotating shaft extending vertically, and a central pressing operation part 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b in the ring of the rotating operation part 302. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 is perpendicular to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. As the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates around the axis, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345 to detect rotation. Therefore, the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference, unlike the conventional rotary operation part. In addition, since the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, the portion (operation ring transmission gear 350) that transmits the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 ) can be a part of the entire circumference of the rotary operation part 302 . Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space below the rotary operation unit 302, and a performance in which a sufficient number of LEDs are annularly arranged in a height between the rotary operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345 is provided. An operation ring decoration board 352 can be arranged. Then, according to the game state that changes by playing a game in the game area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board By properly emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 352, the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, which constitute the rotary operation unit 302, are sufficiently (uniformly) decorated with light. It is possible to make the rotary operation unit 302 conspicuous and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotary operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. In the same direction and at the same speed, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be sequentially lighted (turned on/off). As a result, the rotary operation unit 302 rotates in a state in which specific parts of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are decorated with light. An illusion can be created as if an LED is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302, and the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotary operation unit 302 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Alternatively, according to the game state, when executing a player-participation type effect that requires a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the direction desired to be operated, the player can be encouraged to rotate the rotary operation unit 302, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the rotation direction and rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302 are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and are arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration board 352. A plurality of LEDs can be turned on in order so as to have the same rotational speed as the rotary operation unit 302 . As a result, even though the player is rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302 rotates together with the rotary operation unit 302 in a state where a certain part of the rotary operation unit 302 emits light. , a strong impact can be given to the player, and the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the luminous decoration can give a premium feeling, and at the same time, there is something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think and increase the expectation for the game, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs arranged in a circular ring on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be made to emit light in sequence, the player can see the light emission decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the ring-shaped rotating operation part 302 is for rotating operation, and to make it easy for the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. At the same time, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the player participation type performance, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

In addition, the transmission detection gear member 345 is attached rotatably about an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotary operation unit 302, and when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotation operation A transmission detection gear member 345 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the portion 302, and in the plate unit 200, the configuration related to the rotation operation portion 302 (the effect operation unit 300 or the rotation drive unit 340). can be compactly assembled, the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotary operation unit 302 can be conspicuous and strongly attracted to the player.

Furthermore, it is equipped with an operation ring drive motor 342 that rotates the rotation operation unit 302 via a transmission detection gear member 345 in accordance with the game state, and as described above, a rotation that can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration board 352 Since the operation part 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the player's rotation operation, the rotation operation part 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated in accordance with the game state, and light is emitted. By decorating, it is possible to make the rotary operation part 302 conspicuous in the lower and front part of the game area 5a, and to attract the player's attention to the rotary operation part 302 strongly.

In addition, since the rotation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, when the player rotates the rotation operation part 302, the rotation is detected. By rotating the rotary operation unit 302 in the same direction as the operation unit 302 by the operation ring driving motor 342, the rotary operation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operation feeling of the rotary operation unit 302 can be lightened. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 by the operation ring driving motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, it is possible to apply a load to the rotary operation of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby improving the operational feeling of the rotary operation unit 302. can be heavy. Furthermore, in response to the rotation operation by the player, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed by applying a rotation force to the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring driving motor 342 for each predetermined rotation angle. A click feeling can be given. Further, by reciprocally rotating the rotary operation portion 302 within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring driving motor 342, the rotary operation portion 302 can be vibrated. In this way, since the operation ring drive motor 342 can give various operational feeling to the rotary operation unit 302, it is possible to respond to more various player participation type productions, so that the game can be played with various productions. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the production operation ring decoration board 352 is provided, when giving the operation feeling of the rotary operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be operated in the same manner as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in a direction or in a direction opposite to the rotation operation, the operation feeling can be supported by the light, so that the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, it becomes easier to secure a space below the rotary operation unit 302, and a larger number of LEDs can be mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be arranged, the rotary operation unit 302 can be more uniformly and brightly decorated with light, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, the rotary operating section 302, the outer peripheral pressing operating section 303b, and the central pressing operating section 303a are each illuminated and decorated in good condition by the effect operation ring decorating board 352, the outer peripheral button decorating board 377, and the central button decorating board 376. Therefore, by making them emit light as appropriate, only the rotary operation portion 302 can be decorated with light, only the pressing operation portion 303 can be decorated with light, only the central pressing operation portion 303a can be decorated with light, and the peripheral pressing operation can be performed. Only the portion 303b can be illuminated to make it easier for the player to recognize the operation portion to be operated, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation.

In addition, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape on the peripheral button decoration board 377, by sequentially illuminating the LEDs, it is possible to create a lighting effect in which the light rotates. It is possible to perform an effect in which the effect by the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the effect by the outer circumference button decoration board 377 in the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are associated. Specifically, for example, when prompting the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the LED of the outer circumference button decoration board 377 are caused to emit light in sequence. , luminous decoration in which the light rotates in two rows. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the LED (peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 rotates the light according to the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302, and the player can On the other hand, when it is desired to reverse the rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302, the LEDs of the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are used to rotate the light in the reverse direction. In this way, since the player can see the effects of various light emission, the player can be entertained and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, a production operation ring decoration board 352, an outer circumference button decoration board 377, and a center button decoration board 376, which light-embellish the rotary operation part 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b, and the central pressing operation part 303a arranged concentrically, respectively, are provided. For example, by causing the respective LEDs to emit light in the order of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the center button decoration board 376, or in the reverse order, the rotary operation unit 302 It is possible to show an effect of light concentrating from the center pressing operation portion 303a and a light effect of diffusing from the center pressing operation portion 303a to the rotary operation portion 302. FIG. As a result, it is possible to show the player more colorful luminous decorations, to entertain the player, and to direct the player's attention to the central pressing operation part 303a or to the rotation operation part 302. It is possible to encourage the operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the rotation operation portion 302 to enjoy the player participation type presentation.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which a game is played is detachably attached to the body frame 4 from the front, and the front face of the body frame 4 can be opened and closed. A door window 101a through which the game area 5a can be viewed from the front is formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 which can be closed, and a glass unit 160 provided with a transparent flat glass plate 162 is attached to the door window. An upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 are attached to the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to close the door frame 101a, and below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 for storing game balls B for playing games. A plate unit 200 with a is attached.

On the upper surface of the plate unit 200, there is provided an annular donut-shaped rotary operation portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and a cylindrical rotary operation portion 302 coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302. and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a. Two large-diameter plate center top decorations 312a and plate center bottom decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other, and are continuous with both ends of the plate center top decorations 312a and plate center bottom decorations 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450 are similarly shaped as shown in FIG. 453 is attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

Therefore, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the operating portion 303b and the central pressing operating portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, the rotating operating portion 302 and the pressing operating portion 303 can be made more conspicuous, and the player can operate them. The rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby enhancing the interest. A decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, the rotation operation part 302, the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are formed in a donut shape in which a similar cylindrical shape (tube) is ringed, and are provided below the rotation operation part 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the plate center upper decoration 312a. Therefore, the player can see the decoration as if the outer periphery of the game area 5a is surrounded by a cylindrical tube, and the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be given a sense of unity. The appearance can be improved, and the player's interest can be directed to the inside (the game area 5a, the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube to enhance the appeal. , the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by heightening expectations for the game on the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the plate unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and the lower plate center decoration body 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are largely conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest and appealing to the player. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the rotary operation part 302 has a donut shape, which is a circular cylindrical shape, the upper surface, the outer side surface, the inner side surface, etc. of the rotary operation part 302 are easier to handle than in the case of a flat disc shape. Since it becomes easier for the player to put his or her finger on the rotating operation unit 302, the player can rotate the rotating operation unit 302 as desired. Further, since the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower center plate decoration 312b are formed larger than the rotation operation portion 302, the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower center plate decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. Since it protrudes outward, the player can put his/her arm or put his or her finger on the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, and the player can operate the rotation operation part 302 in a comfortable posture. At the same time, the presence of the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b projecting forward from the rotation operation part 302 prevents the player from getting too close to the rotation operation part 302. As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotary operation unit 302 in which the player's arms and fingers can be moved, and the operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved. In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, the player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 as desired when the player participation type production is executed. It is possible to entertain the participatory performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, the pressing operation portion 303 composed of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a inside the rotating operation portion 302 can be moved between a retracted position (lowered position) and a projected position (raised position). Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing operation portion 303 protrudes upward more than the rotary operation portion 302, so that the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made to appear larger. As well as being able to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the operation of the rotary operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

Also, when the pressing operation part 303 is at the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation part 303, so that the player's attention should be directed to the rotation operation part 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation part 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation part 303 is more conspicuous than the rotating operation part 302, so that the player's attention can be directed to the pressing operation part 303. Therefore, by moving the pressing operation part 303 between the lowered position and the raised position according to the content of the player participation type presentation to be executed, the player is prompted to operate the presentation operation part 301 to be operated. This allows the player to operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 accurately to enjoy the player-participation type performance.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 303 inside the rotary operation portion 302 is set to the lowered position, the rotary operation portion 302, the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b, and the central pressing portion 303a are at the same height, and the rotation operation is performed. When the portion 302 and the central pressing operation portion 303a become operable and the pressing operation portion 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a protrude above the rotating operation portion 302. At the same time, the rotation operating section 302, the outer peripheral pressing operating section 303b, and the central pressing operating section 303a become operable. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be appropriately used, and it is possible to respond to more various productions and to allow the player to enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the plate center upper decoration board 314 and the plate center lower decoration board 316, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410 Since the board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided, the rotation operation part 302 and the plate center upper decorative body 312a are provided. The overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved by luminous decoration of the plate center lower decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing by strongly attracting the interest of the players. In addition, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration 312a, the plate center lower decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are appropriately illuminated. By decorating, the player's line of sight can be guided from within the game area 5a to the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302), or can be guided from the production operation unit 301 to the game area 5a. The player can be made to operate the performance operation part 301 or play a game in the game area 5a according to the state, and the player can be prevented from getting bored and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b does not occur. Although what is not detected is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b may be detected. As a result, even with the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are changed to different effects, and when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is prompted. This makes it possible to perform more diverse player-participation-type presentations, entertain the player, and suppress the loss of interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the pressing operation portion 303 (the central pressing portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b) is moved to the raised position, pressing the pressing portion 303 moves to the lowered position. However, it is not limited to this, and when the pressing operation part 303 is pressed in the state of the raised position, the downward movement may be restricted after slightly downward movement from the raised position.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the rotating operation part 302 is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 that protrudes forward, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating operation part is provided inside the plate unit. In addition to the arrangement, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation portion may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the plate unit. This also allows the player to enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation section as described above, and suppresses the loss of interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, the body frame 4 is provided with the speaker unit 620a that communicates with the inner space 40a (port member 47) of the curtain plate via the connecting tube portion 43a, but this is not the only option. Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102, 154, and 103 to 120. 102 and 154 are block diagrams of the main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 102, and FIG. 104 shows game ball lending device connection terminals for relaying electrical connections between the payout control board constituting the main board, the CR unit, and the frequency display board. 105 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 154, FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 107 is a liquid crystal display control. 4 is a block diagram around a VDP with built-in sound source in a section; FIG.

In the above-described embodiment, the door frame 3 is not provided with an effect display device related to the effect display. However, in the following description, apart from the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, the door frame side effect display device 460 (see FIG. 107) relating to the effect display can be provided on the door frame 3 as well. , it will be described as a control configuration.

As shown in FIG. 102, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633 and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 154, the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, controls power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and executes the game operation after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., and detection signals from various detection switches are input. A main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, a power failure or instantaneous and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of power failure.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an” is built in. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), A predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal ( Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When finished, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches input to various input terminals thereof is not reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later, so that various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system, which will be described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

99, a first starting hole sensor 3002 that detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, a second starting hole sensor 2402 that detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. is entered in 99, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a big winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball entering the big winning hole 2005, and a back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is attached to a panel relay board 3031 attached to the game board 5, and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starter solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 via the panel relay board 3031, or outputs a drive signal to the predetermined output port of the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d. By outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the first special symbol display 1404 via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the panel relay board 3031, and the function display unit 1400 , Second special symbol indicator 1406, first special pending number indicator 1405, second special pending number indicator 1407, normal symbol indicator 1402, state indicator 1401, and round indicator 1408 or output a drive signal do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the substrate 633, or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, the main controller with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the prize winning sensor 2403 use non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches. On the other hand, the general winning hole sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2402, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2401 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with a long life are used for the first starter sensor 3002, the second starter sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. FIG. Also, when a big winning game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball enters frequently, so the big winning hole sensor 2403 frequently detects the game ball. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long life is also used for the big winning hole sensor 2403 . On the other hand, in general winning openings 2001 and 2201 into which game balls do not enter frequently, detection by general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020 use mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switches.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 633 as serial data. When the payout control board 633 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, it outputs a signal (primary payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. A signal (primary payment ACK signal) is output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 1310ah. (see FIG. 112). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 112). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 108). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. is output from the payout control board 633, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of game balls includes a payout control unit 633a for performing various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 for performing various functions, and a state display of the pachinko machine 1. and an error LED indicator 860b. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, controls the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output by being operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout, controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially converts various information (game information) on the game and various commands on payout from the main control board 1310 into the main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands are sent as serial data to the payer. As a signal, serial data is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, this payout control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control, the payout When an operation error occurs, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. , when a detection signal (body frame open detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame open command (first body frame open command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals are input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like. A payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

A ball-out detection sensor 574 for detecting the running out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting game balls released from payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 580. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that, for the sake of explanation later, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are applied to the payout control input circuit 952b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 630 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the form of serial data at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives an operation signal (detection command) of the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.

When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 633 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 584, or outputs the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED indicator By outputting the drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is outputted from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the dispensing device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotator and the game ball engage near the entrance of the sorting space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 580, making it difficult to rotate the payout rotator. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "payout detection sensor error" is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit). is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored). game balls are full), and when the number "7" is displayed, the fact that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection from payout control board 633 to CR unit 6) is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock (with prize ball stock (not paid out))" (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached the predetermined number of balls).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually put out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) regarding the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are communicated to the hall computers installed in the game balls.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. It is designed to prevent the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down. It is designed not to malfunction or break down due to application of abnormal voltage. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the balance on the ball lending/returning display unit. The signal is output to the rental device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental/return display section. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. there is

In addition, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 108) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 633 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 952b to the payout control MPU 952a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

[7-2-2. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 633a and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 633, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 633, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 is electrically connected to the substrate, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 630 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 . The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 633 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

A ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted on the part surface of the frequency display plate 365 at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the returning button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the rental ball unit 360 .

The ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

The ball lending/returning display unit is composed of three segment displays arranged in a line, and each segment display of these three digits is sequentially driven by a so-called dynamic lighting method to display three digits. The lighting of the segment display is controlled. With such lighting control, the ball lending/returning display section displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6 . The ball lending/returning display unit includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display out of three-digit segment displays, and this designated one-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed, are connected from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the main door relay terminal plate 880, the one-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated in accordance with the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays can be visually recognized through the remaining loan display portion 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 630 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid and the ball lending state is possible controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/returning display section through the current limiting resistance mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 .

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is sent from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board for connecting the game ball lending device PRDY, which is a signal to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or not possible. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount after subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328 .

[7-3. Power supply board 630]
Next, the power supply board 630 will be briefly described. The power board 630 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , and a shooting control section 633b that controls shooting by the shooting solenoid 542 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power control unit 935 operates a power switch 934 to operate a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. and a power generation circuit 935d for generating power.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The shooting control section 633b, which performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145, mainly comprises a shooting control circuit 953a. The shooting control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the intensity (shooting intensity) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182, and an operation signal from the handle 182. A detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not to forcibly stop launching (shooting) the game ball according to the player's will. , and are inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315 . In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 633 to notify that effect. .

The shooting control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and controls the output to the shooting solenoid 542. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. , control to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the shot ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 performs control of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450, while performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, speaker 921 and upper speaker A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from 573, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second. ), and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by turning a knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control, controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data and various schedule data, Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes of various LEDs, etc. and information for managing the schedule data that defines the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state and special A peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing performance flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally ”.) and are provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time when the power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when the power is cut off for a long time). ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 630 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 630, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. It loses its contents as it can no longer be held.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board in 3 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and via the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa as the center, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h. It reads and writes various data via an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and an external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. /O port 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and It reads and writes from/to an input/output device such as a peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and a peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between input/output devices such as O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to transfer data independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. Serial I/O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices are connected via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. to read and write.

A peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral bus 1511ai, and an external bus 1511h to control a central processing unit of a peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control RAM 1511c. Storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED , a serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining the performance operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, it will be reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state is confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a, and its resistance value is varied by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko hall staff of abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 and fraudulent actions against the pachinko machine 1, and content related to game effects are announced. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from mute to maximum volume. The sound volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above.
As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reduced. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of an abnormality or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 can be made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The schedule data for screen generation is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is defined. It is The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the VDP built-in sound source 1512a. and a track number for indicating in which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is used based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set. Therefore, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of 80% obtained by adding 5% which is the acquired correction information to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the effect display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1600, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and a backup area stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. various control data copy areas 1511ce for dedicated storage; backup unmanaged work areas 1511cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up; is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf to be cleared to zero. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. and to indicate the game state (for example, to indicate the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr ) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" is, as will be described later, when the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" are respectively appended (effect information (1fr) and effect Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1 ms)" means that the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. and "Bank4" (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored. This is a storage area in which door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set. In the received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set. is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, which is a storage area to be set, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak has an effect display drive board 4450 on its periphery. Drawing data is received from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the control board 1510, and if the received drawing data is determined to be abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output based on the LOCKN signal described later to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the frequency of abnormality and the occurrence state of abnormality between connections with the effect display drive board 4450 are set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in Bank 0 (1 fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in Bank 0 (1 ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It's becoming

In the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf stores the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms), which is copied to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. , as effect backup information (1 ms), is sent to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, It is copied to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the second backup area 1511cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, This page is copied to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the first backup area 1511cb, one pair is Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr), and one pair is Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing pages, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed as the effect backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in common. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. It should be noted that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the state command at the time of power-on from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 122) indicates the start of the RAM clearing effect and the game state (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 103 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, it instructs the start of the effect. ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is designed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state) etc.), on the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a first backup area 1511db to a second backup area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is for backing up various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc dedicated to storing a copy of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 1511db, a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control section]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, as shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source"), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a, game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 In addition to various character data of the screen displayed, various sounds such as music and sound effects A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and a serial to the door frame side effect display device 460. The converted drawing data is directed toward the effect display driving board 4450 which is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. Transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side performance for transmission, and differential circuit 1512e that differentiates LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511, into a plus signal and a minus signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is transmitted. a forced switching circuit 1512f that is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input. I have. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and for displaying an operation menu background image, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, volume adjustment icon to be described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, body frame back image data used for displaying the body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the player, display of the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for , break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the rest timer setting screen, and during rest screen image data used for displaying the during rest screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestive display object image data used to display a suggestive display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, when a V blank signal (to be described later) is input, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data is output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting various control data from the control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, when the V blank signal is input, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the top sound command data.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in tone generator, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source controls the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the tray side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. A VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and outputs the drawing data for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame periphery. A terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display stored in the plate unit 320 by being arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450 . As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5 respectively, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 can The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because the control board 1510 outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of wiring required for the path of CH1 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication system called "Registered Trademark", it is a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 is an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential
Signaling) uses a serial differential interface, whereas the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 . The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen (1 frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for the performance display device 460 is sent from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. It is the data for generating above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to notify that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V-blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" is to hold drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). , drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 .

When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source 1512b, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, the sound data and the volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. subvolume values to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 and shifting to a later-described setting mode.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, resulting in the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. is set to be the maximum volume allowed. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used By synthesizing the set volume adjustment volume 1510a with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. This amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. The maximum volume is synthesized without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be played. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, when the effect sound is being played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound for notifying the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or of a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 will be briefly described. To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track with the sound effect is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track with this sound effect, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the notification sound and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume. Then, it amplifies up to the master volume value which is the volume of sound flowing from the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the sound that actually flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is only the notification sound with the maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound progresses according to the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by turning the knob of the volume control volume 1510a (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed). When the setting mode is entered by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 and the adjustment is made, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), and the sound is played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

In this way, when the effect sound is played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, the effect Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point where the information sound started to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has passed since the information sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores, as shown in FIG. are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source, and converts the right audio data into positive and negative signals as differential serial data to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and frame peripheral relay. It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is output to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 , and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 . As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various presentations.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194. For example, the positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 into one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 107, the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Channel CH2 uses a parallel interface as described above. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , the green video signal, and the blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d transmits three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronizing signal, and a vertical synchronizing signal. and a clock signal, and serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 , the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 , and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 .

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the door. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the first 2 path) is much longer than the wiring length required for the first path, it becomes very susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, on the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 580, the game balls paid out by the payout device 580 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 can guide the game balls. A full-tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank becomes full is arranged.

Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 560 shown in FIG. In this way, various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 580, the full-tank branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 630, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 584 provided in the payout device 580, the noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is subject to noise, etc.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is provided by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter and the receiver. is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case in which parallel lines are employed as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics Even if a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" is adopted by Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, such a hardware configuration alone will not cause damage due to electrostatic discharge of game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 in the affected state. , the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being different from normal and disturbed data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it appears like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, which has a much longer wire length for sending the drawing data than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In the performance transmitter IC 1512d, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method communication is adopted to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration Therefore, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that enters the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of game balls, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play due to the influence of the noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which will be described later, are provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are separately assembled and attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be reduced by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed. If the abnormality occurring in the door frame 3 cannot be eliminated, another door frame 3' is attached to the body frame 4 in place of the abnormal door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is replaced. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the side of the body frame 4, various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 and various wirings provided on the side of the door frame 3' can be connected. and the substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) was employed as the differential one-pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by twisted pair cables, while power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, Power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed apart from the power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined distance. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are provided. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, and the output level of the signal is lowered. occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the substrates of the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The terminal plate 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, while the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and among the harnesses, the wire that supplies power is red and the other multiple wires are gray . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is supplied to the forced switching circuit 1512f in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into differential serial signals (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which is provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and will be described later. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The forced switching circuit 1512f, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, connects the circuits so as to transmit these two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e When the two differential signals of the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the start screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510).

When a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 serializes various and a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side presentation receiver IC SDIC0 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and when it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, sends a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , and output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying that effect, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify.

Further, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input. While it can be determined that an abnormality has not occurred in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in 320, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "Abnormality has occurred in the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side") is displayed. Please call a clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound (for example, "An abnormality has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device ) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the notification sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control section]
As shown in FIG. 105, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without receiving any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, a New Year's countdown will be displayed. The screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. The luminance of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON/OFF control of the backlight or ON only when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of the cold cathode tube type. It is designed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date/time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the production line, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture. , sometimes too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. brightness can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described luminance correction program, so that if the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side effect This corrects the decrease in luminance that accompanies aging of the display device 1600 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, and uses calendar information and time to specify the year, month, and day. Acquire time information specifying minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. Luminance setting information including luminance adjustment information for playing and the currently set luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is lit, this 75% Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted so that the brightness is 80%, which is the correction information acquired by adding 5%. and lights up, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75% to obtain 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on so as to achieve the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc., that are output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the sound volume control volume 1510a is adapted to vary the resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the pachinko machine 1 of an abnormality or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko hall clerk, etc., and a game effect (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state for the player is announced. etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without being dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 can be reduced. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of an abnormality or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the By operating the push operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. there is This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is used. and adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of . Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, within a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed in a customer waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. The dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waits for customers, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. As a result, when a player who has played a game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is too small to hear the music and sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the player sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and played a game. If the player who has been playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can turn the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 630 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 630 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 630]
The power board 630 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power board 630, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

The power board 630, as shown in FIG. 108, includes a power control section 935 and a firing control section 633b. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts AC (24 V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The section 633b is a circuit for driving and controlling the shooting solenoid 542 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 630, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes +37V, and supplies the same to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generating circuit 935d of the firing control section 633b.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control section 633a in the payout control board 633. It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

The shooting control circuit 953a of the shooting control unit 633b uses the +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source, and shoots the game ball with a launching strength (launching strength) that matches the rotational position of the handle 182. While adjusting the drive current for striking (firing) toward the ball and controlling the output to the firing solenoid 542, the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 250. A ball feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and performs control to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the shot ball launching device 650 side.

The power source generation circuit 935d supplies from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 633 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. A power system to which +5V is applied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied is a +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 633 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 633 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from +12V from the payout control board 633. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 633 is also electrically connected. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The positive terminal is designed to allow current to flow toward it. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is connected by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is returned to the payout control board 633, and again from the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 1310 . That is, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is a current flowing toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, which are in the forward direction due to the diode MD0. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. You can do it. As a result, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by MD0, the memory content is retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 are supplied to the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. Two voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . The three types of voltages +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 630 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, They are supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 109(a). 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for the board 5 .

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

On the other hand, the three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 109(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generating circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3 and the like.

In addition, +12 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3 V generated by the upper tray liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 630, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). is. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used in the payout control board 633 .

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the +5V power line is a power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 1310 The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310, either.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 via the diode MD0, and also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 633, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b, etc., +24V from the payout control board 633, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure notice signal as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a through the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 633. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . 109(b), the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frames and the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. FIG. 110 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 111 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 112 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 108 will be described, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control MPU 1310a shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and noise components removed from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. are smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, +5V, whose noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the memory contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25 V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b receives signals from the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the big winning opening sensor 2403, and the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal of , an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 operates within a predetermined period from power-on, the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 633, and the main control of the main control board 1310 It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and error cancellation after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and a function to perform Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 633 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, the main control It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 633 when the operation switch 954 is not operated. becomes HI is input from the payout control board 633 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 633 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 633 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. The main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When it is on, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954. FIG.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. When the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch. The circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 633 . That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the second starting opening sensor 2402, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the big winning gate sensor 2403, the general winning gate sensor 3001, and the gate sensor 2401, which are input via the panel relay board 3031 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input to 1310, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when a power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952a of 633 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 111, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in this embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref with the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 111, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is a resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line and whose other end is connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that, when +24V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 111, the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied, is a resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). A logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q is inverted in logic to be negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a D input terminal 1D terminal and a clock input terminal 1CK terminal that are both grounded (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the voltage is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to a CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be started and stopped after a predetermined time has passed in the processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a when power is turned on on the main control side, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is adapted to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs to the payout control board 633 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 633 as the payout power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring It is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 633a shown in FIG. 113 in the payout control board 633 In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 633 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633 .

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the peripheral control board. 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function each have one transistor. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is issued to the payout control board 633 while the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in 633, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are located between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board, whereas the power failure warning signal logic (ON / OFF signal) using +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a 633 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 110 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 633 as the main payment serial data transmission signal. The main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the circuit 1310cb and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is transmitted to the payout control board 633, and the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 633 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 110 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. respectively entered or equal.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 633, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. and output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2404 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display device 1404 shown in FIG. For the device, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly consists of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). It is composed mainly of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 630 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 633, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, for example, due to a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 630 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 .

In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, +12V, which is higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +12 V is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 so that it is applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When transmitted from the shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a has a storage capacity of 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND). As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 630 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND), and the negative terminal is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5 V supplied from the power supply board 630 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a by applying +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off by turning off the MTR50, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, the +5V power line to which +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 are applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage for the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being lost. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate command failures immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset so that all of them function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt or drop multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. can be received without fail.

[10. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 118. FIG. 113 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control unit, etc., FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 115 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 114, and FIG. FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 118 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 113, the payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. The +5V from the power supply board 630 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end is grounded (GND) and the capacitor PC4 which is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power source generation circuit 935d of the power source substrate 630 shown in FIG. Since it is designed to be supplied to the payout control board 633 as, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying the VBB voltage.

[10-2. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
In addition to a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 633a includes a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor PC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when +5V input to the power terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
+5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. The payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives payout power outage warning signals from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 124, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input via the power supply board 630, a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch will be described. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 154 and various detection switches such as the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed by the body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

The first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed with the body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. be. Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR23 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame open switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned ON to input the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned off to turn off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 154, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 154 receives the main frame door opening signal. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that an outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this manner, it is possible to output the main frame door open signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be in a state of being released from the body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which output power failure warning signal from power failure monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an output power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 633 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 633, one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 through the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 633 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 633, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

Thus, when there is a sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12V and / or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. is entered in The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 154 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 633. is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via a resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full-tank detection sensor 154 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. FIG.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 154 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 630 via the In the payout control board 633, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is inputted to the payout control board 633, and when the storage space is full of stored game balls. , the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 630, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 633 .

When the accommodation space is not filled with stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 154 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 630 to the payout control board 633. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 154 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 630 via the payout control board. At 633, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is input to a switch circuit composed of a resistor PR45, a resistor PR46, and a transistor PTR41 via a full-tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although it was a circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball cut detection sensor 574 and the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full-tank detection sensor 154 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the ball-out detection sensor 574 and the payout detection sensor 591 provided in the dispensing device 580 attached to the main body frame 4, , the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full-tank detection sensor 154 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. Based on the detection signal from 154, when it is determined that the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154, the payout control MPU 952a detects that the game balls in which the storage space is stored are not full, but the payout motor 584 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 584 is driven even though the storage space is full of stored game balls. When game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotor to continue the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 584 is abnormally loaded, the payout motor 584 is overloaded and abnormally heats up and breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is first filtered by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor to remove the noise component. adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end of the capacitor PC41, the other end of which is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding stage and the succeeding stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the succeeding stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts forming the operation switch 954 repeat ON/OFF for a short time, which is a flapping phenomenon. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 are switched. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

As described above, the operation switch 954 is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 633 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel errors after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and error cancellation is performed when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 116 will be described. The payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60, as shown in FIG. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is designed to be The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, through a Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 584. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as a motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supplied to the terminals and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the dispensing motor 584 .

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 584, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 584 to rotate the payout motor 584 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 117 will be described. The payout control board 633 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG generated from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 125 are supplied. Through the terminal plate 869, an EXS signal to inform that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible. and output As shown in FIG. 117, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 113 via ICPIC80 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it.). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 630 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 630 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 630 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 630 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 630. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 630 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 630. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal that tells that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

A PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out rental balls from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent via a resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal that is output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 113, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout power outage notice signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), etc. are input, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310, which notifies completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal described above, is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. Also, detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 124 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payer ACK signal to inform that the main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca to the payer. Output the ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or output the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. For example, output to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 633 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 633 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the payout control board 633 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 633, in addition to the main payout serial data reception signal, the main payout ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a main prize number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, And 2 rounds jackpot information output signal such as jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 633 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls. Main prize number information output signal, main prize number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal and 2 round big hit information output signal from main control board 1310 via payout control board 633. Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the external terminal plate 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 . In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal plate 784, the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 633 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side is output. Information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2nd round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting entrance winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 633 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round big-hit information output signal or the 2-round big-hit information output signal is output to the hall computer as one big-hit information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of big hits with two rounds (2-round big-hit ) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins) is the sum of the number of big wins of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round big wins and the number of occurrences of 15-land big wins from the total number of big wins. , it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to select whether or not to play the game. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even when the player starts playing, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal to the hall computer as the big win information output signal, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins actually occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win, and the data counter stores 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big win and the number of occurrences of the 2nd round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15th round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to stimulate the gambling spirit of the player more than necessary. No.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also output when the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the time it occurs to the time it ends. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals on External Terminal Board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with an external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big win information output signal, and the 2 round big win information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 633, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 .

Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is not generated during a normal game when the player says that the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal to notify that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is generated each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize number information output signal is the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001 and 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to inform that each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10 balls, and the 15-round big win information output signal is a 15-round big win. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that a probability fluctuation occurs. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol display device 1404 or a second special symbol display device 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that informs that the variable display is finished (stopped). It is a signal that tells that it is in a stopped state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that tells that a time saving state is occurring, and the start winning prize information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, it is a signal to notify that effect.

As shown in FIG. 119, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal plate 784 . The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number of prize balls information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the number of prize balls information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls put out by the Pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the put out game balls.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 are opened. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. / Or it can grasp that the main body frame 4 is opened.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1404 and the second special symbol display device 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the end (stop) of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol indicator 1404 and the second special symbol indicator 1406 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, and count the number of times to display the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start winning prize information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , Every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting hole winning information output signal is inputted. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole 2004, count the number of times the starting hole winning prize information output signal is input, and send it to the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. The 15-round jackpot information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the pachinko machine 1 generating 15-round big wins while the 15-round big win information output signal is being input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 15-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 15-round big win information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. The 2-round big win information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 2-round big win is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round big win information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is inputted to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round big win information output signal is being inputted. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 2-round big-win information output signal is inputted.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. The normal symbol display information output signal is, as described above, a signal that informs that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is designed to be output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. FIG. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped), count the number of times, and display the total number of variable displays of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving information output signal is input. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times that the information output signal during time saving is input.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the information output signal during probability fluctuation, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the probability fluctuation is occurring. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of occurrences of probability fluctuations in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the played game balls, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize number information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 outputs 10 prize balls each time the main prize number information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that game balls are scheduled to be put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls to be put out. can do. It should be noted that game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to be output with an interval of 0.128 seconds as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 633 side, while the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output via (pass through) the payout control board 633 . The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, respectively. By electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to mistakenly connect other wirings. It is possible to prevent an unintended connection. Various signals output on the payout control board 633 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed, and various signals output on the payout control board 633 side are transmitted to the hall computer. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a row from the left side of the center toward the right side, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 633 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side It is possible to prevent erroneous electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the prize number information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side and the main prize number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively sent from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When the number of game balls is running low, if the pachinko machine 1 happens to hit a 15-round jackpot, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (For example, if ball clogging or ball entanglement occurs in the payout device 580, game balls cannot be paid out if this cannot be resolved). Then, according to the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 as described above. Since it is a signal to convey that every time, when game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 633 can output a winning ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like checks, for example, a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the ball clogging (or, for example, to Then, by specifying the position of the clogged ball or the position of the jammed ball and resolving it, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress even when the hall clerk or the like is proceeding with the work, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk or the like after the jackpot of 15 rounds is completed. When the state is restored, the payout control board 633 will pay out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another, and the payout control board 633 is at the time when the 15 round big win is completed and the 15 round big win is not occurring. Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, it outputs a prize number information output signal to notify that effect and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will happen. As a result, an extremely large number of game balls are put out even though the 15-round jackpot has not yet occurred. , there arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between .

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 584 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 633 and the prize balls are actually paid out, that is, the payout control board 633 outputs the prize ball number information output signal. As a signal of the main control board 1310, the game ball that entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 633 and the external terminal plate 784 are output. A system was adopted in which the information was transmitted to the hall computer via the system. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle, etc., ball clogging in the payout device 580, ball jamming, etc.) occur, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this game state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the relationship can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the game state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed in the plate unit 320. A liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 120, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are sent as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the positive signal and the negative signal are input by the common mode choke coil SDL0. Noise can be separated from negative signals. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, and It restores to three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before being serialized). Although the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits as described above, , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two signals obtained by differentiating certain LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also inputted. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so that the circuit is connected so as to As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input to the motion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the transmitter IC 1512d for frame side effect is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door-frame From the transmitter IC 1512d for side effects, the serial signal (serial data) by THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method is used as a positive signal and a negative signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentially converted into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. Door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to produce the startup screen on the game board side when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period during which the display is displayed on the display device 1600, or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is operated. This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, THine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the signal is not output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and an abnormal event occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 to output the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 By outputting it, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3 V generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply is supplied to the VDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal that serves as the ground for this TTL output. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for this LVDS input, and the capacitor SDC2 is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3 V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via a resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of a varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltages on the +3.3V electrical line supplied through resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (logic transitions from LOW to HI) or falling edge (logic transitions from HI to LOW). As shown, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal instructs whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it will be in a state where it cannot be output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them. Operation modes include a normal mode and a handshake mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are generated based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. and three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signals) of a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is connected. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the parallel signal restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and controls the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d in order to inform the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the establishment of a predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal. to output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side presentation drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Send to receiver IC SDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. In addition, the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal plate 882 .

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2, which is the damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510 .

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. terminal. In this embodiment, the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals because the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used.

The DE terminal outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that indicates whether the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid. A DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal for outputting a 1-bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the same ground. It's becoming

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 122 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 122 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 124 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the big winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 580) to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 which are storage trays (a device that pays out game balls as rental balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 121(a), the main control board Command 10H to command 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 633. Command 10H designates one prize ball, and command 11H. , 2 prize balls are specified, and 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 633 controls to drive the payout motor 584 and pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to , command 20H designates one prize ball, command 21H designates two prize balls, and command 2EH designates a prize ball. 15 spheres are specified. The payout control board 633 controls to drive the payout motor 584 and pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to CR machines and general machines, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 121(c), and this command 30H designates a self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the transmission of the command, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 633 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in Figure 122 and Figure 123, special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display, status classified into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 123, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Toku-zu 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of Toku-zu 1 synchronization production, the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and time saving state. In addition, in the probability and time saving state, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state, a low probability It consists of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (as a normal game state, A low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time during which patterns are variably displayed as compared with a non-time-saving state (normal game state) and stop-displaying in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery to be described later in a predetermined time is obtained. To obtain a lottery opportunity for a special pattern without reducing the number of balls in hand by increasing the number of times of stop display compared to the non-time-saving state and by increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls to the second start port 2004.例文帳に追加(in other words, compared to the non-time-saving state, the number of decisions on whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and when the pair of movable pieces is opened and closed, the pair of movable pieces is opened and closed. By lengthening the period of operation, the acceptance rate of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 (entering rate) is increased).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the second special symbol display device 1406 of. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production is intended to instruct the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 122, the section related to big win includes big win opening, big win 1 open N-th display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win 1 open Nth display command is the start of the big win 1 open in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 99). During or start of opening of the N-th round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is the start of the closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (large opening of the starting opening unit 2100). The command indicates that the winning opening 2005 is closed between rounds or has started closing), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls from 0 to 10 has been counted (shown in FIG. 123). The number of game balls that entered the big winning hole 2005 detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403) is transmitted, the big winning ending command instructs the start of the big winning ending, and the big winning symbol display command , to instruct the display of the big hit pattern information.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is the start of the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting unit 2100 at the time of the small hit or The small win count display command is a small win middle and large winning opening winning effect (during a small winning, the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403). A small hit ending command instructs the start of a small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 Nth display command is when the big win 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (of the starter unit 2100 When the large winning opening 2005 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is transmitted when the large winning opening 1 is closed (start closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 and when the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403), the big winning ending command is transmitted when the big winning ending starts, and the big winning pattern display command is transmitted when the big winning opening is opened (the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is released).

In addition, the small winning opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (at the time of opening the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the time of the small winning), The small hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle and large winning opening is won (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 during the small winning), and the small winning ending. The command is sent at the start of the small winning ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 122, the power-on category consists of a command named Power-on State and Main Control Return Destination at Power-on. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. When the power is turned on (including when the power is restored when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure in addition to when the power is turned on), the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, as well as when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). .) In the above-mentioned, low probability short working hours state, high probability short working hours state, low probability non-short working hours state, and high probability non short working hours state information that indicates whether to return in any state (probability and short working hours state) , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which work belongs to which copyright, what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine consists of a series code for specifying which type of machine type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, and a series code for specifying the copyright of the work. and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the game specification that the state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited and a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes

The main control return destination command at power-on instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information indicating the driving state of the starter solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 123 and information indicating the driving state of the big winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. It is configured.

As for the transmission timing of the power-on state command and the main control recovery target command at power-on, when the main control board power is turned on ) is sent to Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time processing described later is executed and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization production relation is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 123, and as shown in FIG. Regarding 1402, it is composed of commands named normal pattern synchronization production start, normal pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, as described above, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state High probability time saving state It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As a game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (when the normal pattern is determined), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern win-loss information is designated. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
8, which are opened and closed by driving the starter solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 99. It consists of commands named opening, general electric open display, and general drawing per ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern per opening command is to instruct the general pattern per opening to start, and the general pattern opening display command is the start of the general pattern opening (a pair of movable pieces are opened in the left and right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2404 state, or when expanding), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern opening command is sent at the start of the general pattern opening, and the general pattern open display command is transmitted when the general pattern is opened (a pair of movable pieces are left and right by driving the start solenoid 2404 When spreading in the direction), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named Winning Abnormal Display, Connection Abnormal Display, Disconnection/Short Circuit Abnormal Display, Magnetic Detection Switch Abnormal Display, Door Open, and Door Close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starter unit 2100 when the big winning hole is entered except during the big win (when the condition device is in operation). is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403), the connection abnormality display command instructs the start of the winning abnormality notification. The disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first starter sensor 3002, the second starter sensor 2402, When a disconnection/short circuit occurs in the electrical connection with the prize winning opening sensor 2403 or the like, it instructs the start of disconnection/short circuit abnormality display. When an abnormality occurs in the sensor 4024, it instructs the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification.

In addition, the door opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 633 shown in FIG. In the open state, the door frame closing command instructs the door open notification, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 . It instructs the end of the door open notification when it is in the state of being opened. On the other hand, the body frame open command is shown in FIG. When the body frame is in the open state, the body frame closing command instructs the body frame open notification. When the door is in a closed state, it instructs to end the notification of opening the body frame.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the jackpot (during operation of the condition device), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 It is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 633 at the time of command transmission to, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, etc., is sent when any one of them is broken or short-circuited. Further, the door open command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a state of being opened with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the status display is divided into commands named Frame status 1 command (equivalent to error occurrence command), Error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to error cancellation command) and Frame status 2 command. there is These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are respectively commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 633, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. test related]
As shown in FIG. 123, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration board shown in FIG. 105). This is for inspecting various substrates such as the driving amplifier substrate 194).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 123, the other divisions include start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command is for instructing the start of starting opening winning effect, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the start of the effect is started. , and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2402, respectively. The high-probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command. is still used for variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1404 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of reservations)), and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbols 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8) The second special symbol display device 1406 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol storage command is normal symbol 1 reservation 0 to 4 It conveys the number of balls (the number of balls (retained number) that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and have not yet been used for normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400). There is, and the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is read ahead and the special symbol 1 is reserved before the special symbol 1 reservation is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1404 of the function display unit 1400 It is intended to instruct the start of the look-ahead effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display device 1404 based on, the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is the second special design display of the function display unit 1400 is the special design 2 hold Before being used for the variable display of special symbols in the device 1406, it is intended to instruct the start of the look-ahead effect to read ahead and notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1406 based on the special symbol 2 reservation.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is set at the time of starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or when the game ball enters the second opening opening). When the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting hole sensor 2402), the speaker 622 shown in FIG. 72 and the upper speaker 464 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the fluctuation reduction has been completed the specified number of times (after the stop period has passed), and the high probability end designation command is In the case of "high probability N times", it is sent at the end of the stop period after the high probability number of times has been digested (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is when the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number changes (In the state where the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and there is a reserved number that is not yet used for the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1404 of the function display unit 1400, the first starting port 2002 when the game ball enters and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the first special symbol display device 1404 for variable display of special symbols from the number of reservations), The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 2 operation pending balls changes (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the special symbol is not displayed on the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400). In a state where there is a reserved number that is not used, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the second special pattern display 1406 displays the variable display of the special pattern. ), and the normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the number of normal symbol 1 operation retained balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for variable display of normal symbols on the device 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the normal symbol display 1402 When the reserved number is reduced by using the variable display of normal patterns), the special pattern 1 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of special pattern 1 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball enters the first start port 2002 When the ball is played and the number of reservations increases), the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls increases (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reservations increases increased). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued at the time of starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or when the game ball enters the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 2402, the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly send voice to notify that effect, but FIG. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed to be used not only to notify by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor whether there is fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command, and does not announce it by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 633 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 124, various commands from the payout control board 633 are divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (equivalent to the error occurrence command) is prepared for ball out, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection error and CR unconnected, and bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit.) is set to 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and connection failure A value of 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value of 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) is prepared for ball catching, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. An error sets bit 3 (B3) to the value 1, and a retry error sets the value 1 to bit 4 (B4). Here, the "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not there is an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have value 0 for B0, value 0 for B1, value 0 for B5, value 1 for B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is provided with "draw ball", and bit 0 (B0) is set to "1" during ball draw. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B2, a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and A value of 0 is set in B7.

As transmission timings for these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at power restoration, frame state change, and error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 125 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. FIG. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 125, and FIG. 127 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for judging a big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a reach (reach loss) when not generating a big hit game state. Reach determination random number for use in determination, shown in FIG. A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot pattern to be used for determining a jackpot pattern derived and displayed by a first special pattern display device 1404 and a second special pattern display device 1406 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot pattern. A random number for determination of the initial value of the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 1404 and the second special symbol display device 1406 when generating the small winning game state. A small-hit symbol random number for use in determining a small-hit symbol and a small-hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the small-hit symbol random number are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination used to determine whether or not to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. A random number for determining the initial value for determination of a normal symbol hit, and a random number for normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the random number for judging a big hit is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first receives a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (a clock signal output from the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 110), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total is stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for determining per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. extracts the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and performs initial value derivation processing that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol per judgment based on this extracted ID code. It is a mechanism that executes and sets this derived fixed value. In other words, the initial value determining random number for determining a normal winning pattern is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and is incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if the ID code is stored in the external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on .

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally acquires game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for illegally obtaining and updating the random number for normal pattern hit determination coincides with the normal pattern hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained, and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 99 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. To 2004, a game state in which a game ball can be accepted cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

125 and 126, the above-described main control program performs main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. FIG. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage section).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 154 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts clocking, and the watchdog timer clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT 1310af with built-in main control is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control program performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power failure clear processing, first, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 111 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. A comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares +24V with a reference voltage or +12V with a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. The result of this comparison is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, with logic HI when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred. Its logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power failure clear process, first, by starting to output a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with the logic being LOW from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is possible to invert and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and to monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

Subsequently, in power failure clear processing, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is Determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on and becomes stable, the main control program outputs the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the logic HI, and passes through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. is entered in As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the PR terminal, which is its preset terminal, is LOW in logic, it outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is its output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a. This is done depending on whether or not the Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated by judging that it is an instruction to clear the RAM.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-described RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this waiting time waiting process, the CPU waits until the system for performing drawing control of the effect display device 1600 by the liquid crystal display control section 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 126 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When it is determined in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main-control built-in RAM as when the power is restored ( step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a itself resets and then returns.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processes being performed. If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30 , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, the main control program writes all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program writes the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a executes processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs RAM clearing and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on this taken out ID code, the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal design per determination. Perform an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and this fixed value is set to the normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 154 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state by hardware In addition to setting the hardware random number setting register to latch and acquire the random number, the hard random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131) Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. A random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number as a big hit determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), the A power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, even if the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored. be. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Subsequent to step S52, the main control program issues an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing is started. Execution of game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt will be regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing based on the concept of time-sharing to use the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Triggered by the input, RAM clear processing is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, even if the error cancellation navigation command is input, the execution of RAM clear processing is regulated ( Game control side normal operation control means), handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced as a game memory unit for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Main control built-in RAM (and payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) function as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the game It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred regarding the ball dispensing operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, big-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, small-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random number for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol hit determination initial value determination, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM and protecting the game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. 102, the starting opening solenoid 2404, the big winning opening sensor 2405, the first special symbol display device 1404, the second special symbol display device 1406, the first special reservation number display device 1405, second special reservation number display 1407, normal symbol display 1402, normal symbol storage display 1188, state display 1401, round display 1408, etc., stop driving signals (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting the RAM access prohibition, access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) becomes impossible, so that updating of the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, charges the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the power from the pachinko island facility will be restored by applying +5V charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power has been cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control-side main process or a main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility is interrupted. When the power is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power cut-off processing.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 when power is restored, the system for performing drawing control of the effect display device 1600 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 105 is activated. (booting) (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) is started to count, and if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs immediately before reaching the Although +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by charging the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms. By performing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off in the main control side power on processing It may not be possible to complete time processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like, and even if the hall clerk or the like does not express the intention of clearing the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, so that the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1310a, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the processing at the time of power failure on the main control side, which is composed of an infinite loop. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64). Since the judgment is made, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT 1310af causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. When the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating the determination, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. When the clock cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then step S52 It is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later). adopted the mechanism. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the part provided by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and the power supply on the main control side The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are covered by hardware so that the interruption processing is surely completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, power is turned on (power restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to convey this, a power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command mainly consists of information indicating the driving state of the starter solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the big winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. It is Here, first, the main control return destination command at power-on includes information instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2404 and information instructing the driving state of the big winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. Problems in the case where there is no main control return destination command at power-on in step S50 are described below.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When the sensor 2405 is driven and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred is restored. , and the state in which the big winning port 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member is shifted to the state in which it is open.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and returned, the jackpot game state It is not possible to indicate at all which round of That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, it is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball entering the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the big winning hole sensor 2405 so that the big winning hole 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107 when, for example, 4 rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. From the main control board 1310, a large prize winning port 1 closing display command instructing a transition from an open state to a closed state (that is, start closing between rounds of the large winning port 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). When the signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the large winning hole sensor 2405 is started to be driven and the large winning hole 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 of the 5th large winning opening opening display command instructing the transition from the closed state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the 5th round of the large winning opening 2005) Send to board 1510 . As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and the time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that indicates that the movable piece is expanded While the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen to be communicated to the player in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting solenoid 2404 to open it. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 to set the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Based on the information, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred, so that the driving of the starting port solenoid 2404 is started and the pair of movable pieces are moved in the left and right direction from the state in which they have risen substantially vertically. It will shift to the expanded state.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004, and it is in a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. There is also a problem that the player does not understand what kind of game should be played.

Thus, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 returns to the main control board 1310 by starting to drive the large winning opening sensor 2405 and opening the large winning opening 2005 from the state closed by the opening/closing member 2107. Since it is possible to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the state where the ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but in the jackpot game state, the driving of the big winning hole sensor 2405 is started and the big winning hole 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. (For example, a screen that conveys to the player the message ``This is a big win. is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after power is restored. In the above example, in a state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, , a screen notifying that the starting port solenoid 2404 has started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the horizontal direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "Expand the movable pieces The peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start hole." A player sitting in front of the machine can be instructed to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the power supply of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 122 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the state command at power-on and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored in As for these commands, in the main-control-side timer interrupt processing to be described later, the state command at power-on is first transmitted, and then the main-control return destination command at power-on is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on status command is shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown is operated to clear the RAM, information to instruct that effect, and when power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is Including when power is restored.) Return in any state (probability and time saving state) from the above-mentioned low probability short working time state, high probability short working time state, low probability non-short working time state, and high probability non short working time state and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used for the copyright of any work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which a probability change occurs in a state where the game is played 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on classified into the power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 125 and 126 .

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches register banks under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 127 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol indicator 1404 and the second special symbol indicator 1406 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric auditors control process, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are sent to the payout control board 633. Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the receiver has been received normally is input. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program, for example, detects a game ball that has entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2201 shown in FIG. Detects a game ball entering the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 102. Detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 102, and a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2402 shown in FIG. , a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 102 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. The detection signal and the payout control board 633 which tells that the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 102 normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read, respectively, and the input information is read. is stored in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first starting hole 2002, the detection from the second starting hole sensor 2402 that detects the game ball that has entered the second starting hole 2004 When each signal is read, the corresponding start-up winning command shown in FIG. 102 and classified as others is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start sensor 3002, a corresponding start start winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second start sensor 2402. Then, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning gate sensor 3001 that detects the game ball that has entered the general winning gates 2001 and 2201, and the big winning gate sensor 2403 that detects the game ball that has entered the big winning gate 2005. A detection signal from, a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 2002, and a second starting hole sensor 2402 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 2004. , and the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are read for the first time when this switch input process is started, and read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs ), each is read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. A determination is made as to whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is not the same, it is read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401, By performing double reading for a total of two times by comparing the 1st to 3rd readings and the 2nd to 4th readings, it is possible to avoid the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401 Reliability can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this win-lose random number update process, the above-described random numbers for the big-hit design and random numbers for the small-hit design are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hitting random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the big win pattern and the random number for the small win pattern are related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), each counter counts up only each time the win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determination of the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit/lose random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for big hit determination. The random number for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-hit-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. When the number of scheduled game balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 121 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 99, a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls is generated, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is generated. has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. Or, when the payout control board 633 does not receive a payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has received the prize ball command normally, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is confirmed. A self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633 . If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls in excess will be added to the number of balls in the next game. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added, and the added number of game balls is calculated. is reached, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 633, the payout control program executes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the state displays shown in FIG. to send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954 .
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by state display in FIG. 102 (frame state 1 command, error release The navigation command and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error generation command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding prize balls is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and a detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005), etc. 102, as an abnormal state, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 102 is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. (random number) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this acquired random number is set as a jackpot determination random number. And the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, whether or not (Determine whether or not to generate a big hit game state (referred to as "special lottery")), take out the value of the counter for updating the random number for the big hit pattern, and store it in advance in the main control built-in ROM It determines whether or not it matches the probability variation per determination value (determines whether or not to generate probability variation). Here, "probability change" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the above-described jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for judging the big hit (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control) and the built-in main control When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first start sensor 3002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol indicator 1404 or the second special symbol indicator 1406 to light the device 1404 or the second special symbol indicator 1406, and store it in the output information storage area described above as output information do. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth display command, big winning mouth 1) classified as big win related shown in FIG. A closed display command, a large winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot pattern display command) is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 99 is opened and closed. When the number of times (round) that the big winning gate 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two times , the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1408 shown in FIG. When it is time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b is set so as to light the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1408 shown in FIG. , the output of the lighting signal to the state indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of the stochastic variation is lit in a predetermined color, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted as gate information, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted. memorize to

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th division, 1st division, 2nd division, and 3rd division. It's like For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third partition of the information storage is shifted to the second partition of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third partition of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is used as a holding ball and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the second start opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. This determination and the corresponding normal symbol variation display pattern are determined based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, and various commands classified into normal symbol synchronization effects shown in FIG. 122 are created and transmitted as information. While storing in the above-described transmission information storage area, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 so as to light the normal design display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern, and set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the random number for determining a normal symbol that has been taken out coincides with a normal symbol per determination value that is pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role effects shown in FIG. 122 is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2404 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal per symbol determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. Determine the display pattern, create various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the payout control board 633 or output a drive signal to the big winning opening sensor 2405 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005 in the jackpot game state, and drives the starting opening solenoid 2404 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece. In addition to outputting signals, main award ball number information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2nd round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output Various information (game information) signals related to games such as signals, information output information during time saving, start winning prize information output signals, etc. are output to the payout control board 633.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, based on the detection signal from the big winning hole sensor 2403 (see FIG. 102) when a game ball entered into the big winning hole 2005 (see FIG. 99) is detected Large winning opening 1 count display command equivalent to the large winning opening count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal drawing synchronization effects, various commands classified as normal electric role effects, Various commands (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) classified into notification display shown in FIG. 102, various commands classified into state display (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command and frame state 2 command), various commands classified as related to testing, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310aa built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main-circumference serial data. When power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, to inform that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 122, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, and the game information is read according to this game information. various commands may be stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 124 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 633 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (rendering control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame close command having the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command having the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 633 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 102 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, since the WDT 1310af with built-in main control restarts the clocking, the WDT 1310af with built-in main control does not forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. 122, which instructs the driving state of the starter solenoid 2404 and the big winning opening sensor 2405, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine, the main control return destination command at power-on in FIG. 122 is peripherally controlled. Output to the substrate 1510 is possible. In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on process on the main control side in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), a power-on state command and a power-on main command classified into power-on shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. and the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data constitutes the power-on state command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to the inspection equipment in the process. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[15. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 144. FIG. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 128, and FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing an example of a rotation detection sensor history creation process, and FIG. 133 is a sprocket. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of a fixed-position determination skip process, FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of a ball-sticking determination process, and FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for adding the stock number of prize balls for rental, FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing an example of stock monitoring processing, and FIG. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout setting process, FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of the ball catching action setting process, FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the retry action monitoring process, and FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing an example of error cancellation operation judgment processing, and FIG. 144 is a signal processing (A) at the time of payout operation by lending a ball, from the CR unit 2 is a timing chart showing input signal confirmation processing (a) of .

First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, followed by payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball bite determination processing, award Ball stock number addition processing, rental ball stock number addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball gripping operation determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball gripping operation setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency Counter reset determination processing and error cancellation operation determination processing will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball catching determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, rental ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the put-out ball grip operation determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error cancellation operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball catching determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, mismatch counter reset determination processing, error cancellation operation determination processing, prize ball stock number for prize balls The order of priority is set in the order of the addition process, the stock number addition process for rental balls, the stock monitoring process, and the payout ball gripping operation determination setting process.

[15-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, turns on the power of the payout control unit as shown in FIGS. time processing. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program sets the interrupt mode in the payout control MPU 952a (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 952a. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing occurs, the processing is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control program performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In the input/output setting of this I/O, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a are set.

Following step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning is sent from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A warning signal (withdrawal blackout warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (output power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal (withdrawal power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 954 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954. When the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is determined that the operation switch 954 does not instruct to clear the RAM. While determining that the operation switch 954 has not been operated, if the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation signal is instructed to clear the RAM, and the operation switch 954 is operated. judge.

When the operation switch 954 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the payout control MPU 952a (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on. state (dispensing control side power-on operation control means). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 952a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, Prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area This flag indicates whether or not to erase the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. whose state is set), and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. be done. Incidentally, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting enables access to the payout control built-in RAM, and enables writing (storage) or reading of payout information, for example.

Following step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control program determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power failure processing is normally terminated, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as when the power is restored. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, information at the time of power recovery is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 952a (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). This power recovery information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power failure processing is not normally completed, the payout control program stores the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clearing process upon detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 954 (payment control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control program sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control program sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power outage warning signal (payout power outage warning signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, the main control board 1310 outputs a power failure warning signal (output power failure warning signal) as a power failure warning. is input from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

When the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input. judge.

On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payout motor 584, payout motor 584, payout motor 584, and payout motor 584 Various information such as drive information for controlling the drive to the payout motor 584, information on the number of balls actually paid out, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED display 860b are stored. Based on the output information, when various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the payout motor 584, or output the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 is actually 10 Every time one game ball is paid out, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 558. Specifically, a prize ball number information signal output determination counter for outputting the prize ball number information is provided. This counter for determining the number of winning balls information signal output receives the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. A process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The processing (program), not shown, for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is based on the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the signal output determination counter based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. In step S548, the value of the winning ball number information signal output determination counter value is read out from the winning ball information storage area, and when the read value of the winning ball number information signal output determination counter value exceeds 10, When the number of winning balls is set, the number of winning balls information signal is output to the external terminal plate 558, and the number of balls exceeding the number of winning balls is used as the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of winning balls information signal, and the winning ball information is stored in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. Memory will be updated in the area ing. ), and outputs a display signal to the error LED indicator 860b.

Following step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 952a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the operation switch 954, the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection A signal, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, and the like are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. do.

Following step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not a ball entanglement state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, a ball entanglement determination is set as a determination condition. time, skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, ball removal determination set when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 803 are discharged time, full tank judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. A ball-out determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 by a detection signal from the sensor 574 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. In addition to performing time management such as, inconsistency due to discrepancy between the number of game balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and paid out and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 Time management of inconsistency counter reset judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not game balls are repeatedly put out. I do. For example, when the ball sticking determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. becomes a value of 0, the ball sway judgment time is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball empty determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball exhausted determination time is set to 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 seconds (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball exhaustion determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0. Accurately measures the time to determine whether the tank is empty, the time to determine whether the tank is full, the time to determine whether the ball has run out, or the time to determine whether the mismatch counter is reset. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6.
In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is executed and the payout operation cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication process, and when the gaming balls are being paid out to the upper tray 321 or the lower tray 322, momentary power failure or power outage causes CR Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and game ball payout cannot be continued, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC at the time of power restoration. etc. are restored to values such as prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before instantaneous power failure or power failure, stored as payout backup information. , The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before an instantaneous power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and game balls can be continuously paid out. It's like

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop when power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stop occurs. Thus, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out control. It outputs to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 952a. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information to determine whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the putout ball licking operation determination setting process , as an error state output setting to the CR unit 6, for example, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that conveys that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible when the communication with the CR unit 6 is not in progress. It is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. to the CR unit 6. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation by the device 580 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit 6 from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the ball for paying out the rented balls. In order to notify that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, the rented balls are paid out. In order to inform that the payout operation for the purpose is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control program performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and out-of-ball check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is used to store the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 described above. It is determined whether or not the tank is full of game balls, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the above-described payout device 580 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number according to a detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574. It is determined whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the holding space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls, a timer interrupt period of 2 ms is used to detect the full tank in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check process. When the detection signal from the sensor 154 is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF. When the state is changed from OFF to ON, timing of the above-described full tank determination time (504 ms) is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the housing space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls, and the above-mentioned state information is the full-tank information that conveys that effect. Store in storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full with the game balls stored, and full-tank information is stored in the state information storage area to notify that effect. do.

Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is determined using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the balls are cut in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check processing. When the detection signal from the detection sensor 574 is ON, and the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball cut check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 When is changed from OFF to ON, timing of the above-described dead ball determination time (119 ms) is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out information to that effect is displayed. While stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out notifies that effect. The information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control program performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 121) are received.
When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormality occurs in various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control program performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball extraction and ball catching are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. do.

Following step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. Remember. For example, the above-described out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is less than a predetermined number, the corresponding display data ( In this embodiment, a display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command) classified into state displays shown in FIG. command, body frame close command, frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error generation command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) and frame state 2 command), and the main control board 1310 Send to For example, when out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is less than a predetermined number, a frame state 1 command is generated. and transmit it to the main control board 1310. In addition, in this command transmission process, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error related to the game ball payout operation, the payout control program provides information on the location where the error occurred related to this payout operation (hereinafter referred to as A frame state 1 command (first error release command) including "error occurrence position information" is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, the payout control program detects that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 1, that is, if an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 954 is detected, the above-described error A cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) is output (command sending means). In addition, this payout control program transmits a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) when a main body frame open detection signal is input from the main body frame open switch 619 (main body frame command sending means, first 1 body frame command sending means). B. When the main body frame closing detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619 is input, this payout control program transmits a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) (main body frame command sending means , first body frame command sending means). Further, when a door frame open detection signal is input from the door frame open switch 618, the payout control program transmits a door frame open command (first door frame open command) (door frame command sending means, first door frame open command). 1 door frame command sending means). On the other hand, when a door frame closing detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, first door frame closing command). 1 door frame command sending means). In addition, this payout control program, in the above-described command transmission process (step S566), reads the error information including the error content from the above-described state information storage area, machine number information for identifying itself from other pachinko machines and An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 . When the hall computer receives this error information signal, it provides the machine number information and the error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall clerk. , it is possible to recognize that the error content contained in the error information has occurred.

Following step S566, the payout control program sets a value C to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Returning to step S539 following step S568, the payout control program sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and checks in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input. If there is no input of this power failure warning signal (withdrawal power failure warning signal), it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 1. When 2 ms has passed, the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 in step S544, the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is set to B in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548. , port input processing is performed in step S550, timer update processing is performed in step S552, CR communication processing is performed in step S554, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, A command analysis process is performed in step S560, a main operation setting process is performed in step S562, an LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, a command transmission process is performed in step S566, and a value is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568. C is set, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control section main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 952a fluctuates. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 952a preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU 952a secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when there is an input of a power failure warning signal (withdrawal power failure warning signal) in step S540, interrupt prohibition is set (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control program stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control program clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control program sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control program sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. Therefore, the payout control MPU 952a is reset, and thereafter the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Incidentally, the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[15-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIGS. 128-129.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program disables the timer interrupt as shown in FIG. 131 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. switch (save) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

Following step S592, the payout control program switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control program sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15-3. Rotation detection sensor history creation process]
Next, the rotation detection sensor history creating process will be described. In this rotation detection sensor history creation process, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 is created.

When the rotation detection sensor history creation process is started, in the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, detects rotation from the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit.) It has a storage capacity, and the history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 is stored in the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area.

Following step S610, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control. In step S612, the input information is read out from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. FIG. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program detects the rotation position of the payout rotator to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. It is determined that the axis has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 .

In step S612, when the detection slit has transitioned from blocking the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 to non-blocking, the payout control program shifts the detection history information of the rotation detection sensor (step S614). In this rotation detection sensor detection history information shift process, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is shifted to the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2. , B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0, and so on.

Following step S614, the payout control program sets the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST to 1 (step S616), and terminates this routine.

On the other hand, when the detection slit has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S618). . In the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the payout control program performs the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information in step S614. B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0, from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. 1 bit at a time.

Following step S618, the payout control program sets the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST to 0 (step S620), and terminates this routine.

In this manner, each time the rotation detection sensor history creating process is performed, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit rotates. Depending on the state in which the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 transitions from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the state in which the detection slit transitions from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840, the least significant bit B0 is set to a value of 1 or Since the value 0 is set, the history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 can be created.

[15-4. Sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotator to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is at a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It should be noted that the determination of the fixed position of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout device 580 finishes paying out the game balls. As a result, the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 can be reliably started in a state in which the balls are not entangled.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 sets the fixed position determination skip flag SKP- as shown in FIG. 133 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630). This fixed position judgment skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position judgment of the payout rotor is performed. It is set to a value of 0 when body position determination is performed (when not skipped).

When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotor is performed, the payout control program reads the rotation detection sensor history information of the payout control built-in RAM. Rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed-position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit). Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the above-described detection slit continues to be the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 at four timer interrupt cycles. It means that the state has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. When the timer interrupt cycle occurs four times, the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 124 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 584 becomes the rotation of the payout rotator of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear and the third gear. Since these first gear, second gear, and third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotor rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation is designed to correspond to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 584, in this embodiment, when determining the fixed position of the payout rotating body, the rotation detection sensor 840 Detection signal history, rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is created in the rotation detection sensor history creation process shown in FIG. This is done based on detection signals from the occurrence of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 584 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the payout rotator due to backlash, and the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash can be absorbed. can be done. Therefore, erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotator due to backlash can be prevented, so that the rotational position of the payout rotator can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 584 . In this embodiment, the period of four timer interrupts is 8 ms (=2 ms×4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program A fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to 1 (step S636). Thereby, it can be set so as not to perform (skip) the determination of the fixed position of the payout rotator. In addition, the payout control MPU 952a sets the rotational position of the payout rotator in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotator.

Following step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to valid (step S638), and terminates this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of concave portions of the payout rotor, and the detection slits are formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detection disk. Also, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 584 becomes the rotation of the payout rotator of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In this embodiment, the rotation between detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection plate (dispensing rotator) is designed to correspond to 18 steps of rotation of the dispensing motor 584 .

The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotor based on the number of steps of the payout motor 584 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Specifically, (1) a transitional state (referred to as an “edge detection state”) in which the detection slit begins to transition from a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is blocked to a state in which it is not blocked, and (2) the detection slit detects rotation. A state in which the optical axis of the sensor 840 is transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as a “fixed position determination state”), and (3) the detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. It is managed in three states: a state (“fixed position determination skip state”) and a state where the position is skipped. The edge detection state (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 584, the fixed position determination state (2) corresponds to four steps of rotation of the payout motor 584, and the fixed position judgment skip state (3). corresponds to 13 steps of rotation of the dispensing motor 584, and a total of 18 steps of rotation controls the rotational position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection plate, that is, the rotational position of the dispensing rotator.

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is shifted from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, so the skip determination time is the time for the payout motor 584 to rotate 13 steps. is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (=2 ms×13 steps).

By enabling the skip determination time in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 952a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S630 (when skipping), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632 When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step 1 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. . It should be noted that the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU952a.

Game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in a prize ball tank 802 and a tank rail 803 , taken into a supply passage of a payout device 580 and guided to the payout device 580 . When game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise. For this reason, the dispensing device 580 is under the influence of noise and under a sanding environment. The payout device 580 is provided with a rotation detection sensor 840, and the detection signal from this rotation detection sensor 840 is susceptible to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of game balls.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state of (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transition state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. This enhances the accuracy of determining the fixed position of the payout rotating body. Since the period and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotor can be calculated in advance as described above, the skip judgment time can be easily set and adjusted.

[15-5. Sphere Determination Processing]
Next, a description will be given of the ball sway determination process. In this ball entanglement determination process, it is determined whether or not a ball entanglement state has occurred due to the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted.

134, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 detects rotation from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

After step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 (step S642). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value is 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1. In step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program This routine ends assuming that the detection slit has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840, that is, the state that the payout rotor is rotating and that the ball is not caught. do.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the ball is stuck. A middle flag PBE-FLG is set to 1 (step S644). This flag during ball catching PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the state of ball catching by the payout rotor is occurring. Each is set to a value of 0 when no action is performed.

Following step S644, the payout control program sets the ball sway determination time to valid (step S646), and terminates this routine. When this ball stagnation determination time becomes effective, the ball stagnation determination time is decremented in the timer update processing of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. .

[15-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes prize ball stock number addition processing and prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. be. First, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially. After the game balls are paid out by the pay-out device 580, it is set to carry out the processing of adding the stock number of prize balls for rent.

[15-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 executes the prize ball command as shown in FIG. 135 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. The corresponding number of prize balls PBV is read from the number of prize balls information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described later in detail, is an information table in which the prize ball commands and the number of prize balls PBV are associated and stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM.

Following step S652, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the payout device 580, that is, the number of balls that have not yet been paid out. there is As a result, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls ranging from 0 to 32,767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

The payout control program adds the number of prize balls PBV read out in step S652 to the number of prize balls stock PBS read out in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. After the addition in step S656, the winning ball command read out in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[15-6-2. Addition processing of stock number of prize balls for rental]
Next, the processing for adding the stock number of prize balls for rental will be described. When this processing for adding the stock number of prize balls for lending is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program issues a ball lending request as shown in FIG. 136 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a ball rental request signal.

When there is no ball rental request signal in step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the storage area (step S662), the rental ball number RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine ends. The number of rental balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 25 is set as the number of rental balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the ball rental request signal read out in step S660 from the input information storage area. In addition, in the present embodiment, since prize balls are given priority (distinguishably managed between prize balls and rental balls), even when there is a ball rental request signal, the ball rental request signal is held. , Rental balls will be paid out upon completion of the payout of prize balls. Therefore, in this embodiment, the rental balls are paid out after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes zero.

[15-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, stock monitoring processing will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues the game while the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is filled (stocked) with game balls. It is a process to

When the stock monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to 1 (step S674), and terminates this routine. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking game balls in the storage space of the foul cover unit 270, and the number of unpaid game balls (the above-described prize ball stock number) reaches or exceeds the caution threshold value TH. It is a flag indicating that it has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when reaching the caution threshold TH or more, and set to a value of 0 when not reaching the caution threshold TH or more.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to 0 (step S676), and terminates this routine.

When the game state becomes a big win and the player is relaxing and watching the performance unfolding on the performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. The played game ball may not be removed from the lower plate 322 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263. - 特許庁When the game is continued in this state, the lower tray 322 is filled with game balls, and the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with game balls. When the housing space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases to exceed the caution threshold value TH, and the door frame 3 is provided as a caution effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative substrates blink. By this flashing, for example, it is possible to inform the store clerk of the hall that he/she should be careful of the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player to remove the game balls from the lower tray 322, and the player fills the lower tray 322 (accommodating space of the foul cover unit 270) with game balls. It is possible to prevent continuation of the game.

In this embodiment, the caution threshold TH is set to a value of 50, which is approximately one-fifth of the upper limit of 255 that can be represented by one byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should pay attention to the game at the earliest possible stage.

[15-8. Set-up processing for determination of ball-out movement]
Next, a description will be given of the put-out ball grip operation determination setting process. In this put-out ball catching operation determination setting process, the pay-out motor 584 puts out the game ball to the upper tray 321 or the lower tray 322, performs a ball catching operation, or does not perform such putting out or discharging. or is a process to set either.

138, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 executes the payout control program under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

After step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 103 (step S682). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value is 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1. In step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S682, the payout control program, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 (step S684). This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation, which will be described later, is operating abnormally. are set to the value 0 respectively when the operation is working normally).

In step S682, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684 , when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormally operating, the payout control program determines whether or not the ball squatting flag PBE-FLG is 1. is determined (step S686). This ball catching flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball catching state is occurring due to the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. It is set to a value of 1 when performing an action, and to a value of 0 when not performing a swing motion.

In step S686, when the value of the ball catching flag PEB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when the ball is not being caught, the payout control program stores prize ball information in the payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 584 .

When the prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there are unpaid balls, the payout control program determines whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls. is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and dead ball check process of step S556 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the aforementioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, full tank information is read out from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the housing space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls.

When the housing space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full of stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program performs a payout setting process described later (step S694), and ends this routine. In this payout setting process, a payout operation of putting out game balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 is performed.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls stored in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped. When prize balls are generated while the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped, the number of balls not paid out by the payout motor 584 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition processing shown in FIG. will increase over time.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not greater than the value 0 (is 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, game balls are not put out.

On the other hand, in step S686, when the value of the ball catching flag PBE-FLG is 1, that is, when a ball catching operation is being performed, the payout control program performs a ball catching operation setting process (step S700), which will be described later, and this routine is executed. exit. In this ball catching operation setting process, a ball catching operation for canceling the ball catching state by the payout rotating body of the payout device 580 is performed.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the payout control program sets the drive signal output stop (stop) to the payout motor 584. (step S702). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S702, the payout control program sets an error status output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and terminates this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a (CR unit 6 When the logic of BRDY from the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, it is kept falling, the logic of the PRDY signal is kept LOW, that is, it is kept falling, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to the PRDY signal output setting information. and store it in the CR communication information storage area.
As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 127, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is passed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 CR. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing in FIG. The EXS signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. . Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held after falling), the logic LOW is maintained, and when the logic of the EXS signal is HI. One is to maintain its logic HI when (the EXS signal is held rising).

[15-8-1. Payment setting processing]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. This payout setting process is a process of setting to drive the payout motor 584 to pay out game balls.

When the payout setting process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. Read out (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be put out by the payout motor 584, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

After step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be put out by the payout motor 584 remains.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 is zero, the payout control program stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (stop ) is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

Following step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716) and reads the real ball count PB (step S718). This real ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 . This count, which will be described in detail later, is obtained from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. based on the detected signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read out from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S718, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB read out in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read out in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the actual ball count PB is set to 0 (Step S722), and this routine ends. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, at step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read at step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591.

When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program adds (increments) the real ball count PB by 1 (step S730), and ends this routine. By incrementing the real ball count PB in step S730, the real ball count PB is counted up.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In this way, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726, and when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the judgment of step S728, that is, If the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the game ball was not received by the concave part of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, so that one game ball could not be put out. I judge. Therefore, the payout control program sets the drive command number DRV to a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the above-described step S720 in order to pay out the ball that should have been paid out again. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the judgment of step S728, that is, when the real ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1, which is the one ball to be paid out, is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, the value 1, which is the one ball that should be paid out, can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, so that a retry operation can be performed to pay out the one ball that is supposed to be paid out again. . By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the risk of the game balls not being paid out to the player, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the non-paying out of the game balls.

[15-8-2. Spherical movement setting process]
Next, a description will be given of the ball swaying motion setting process. This ball catching operation setting process is a process of setting to eliminate the ball catching state by the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is transmitted.

When the ball-sticking operation setting process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is performed based on the sphere sway determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball-sticking determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball sway determination time has elapsed.

When it is determined in step S750 that the ball sticking determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program reads the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752). .

Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S754). This determination is made by determining whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value is 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1. In step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set so as to perform the ball gripping operation (step S756), and this routine ends. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S758, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the ball-switching flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-switching operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This flag during ball catching PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the state of ball catching by the payout rotor is occurring. Each is set to a value of 0 when no motion is performed (end of ball catching motion).

On the other hand, when the ball sticking determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S762, the payout control program sets an error status output to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that it is currently in a state where ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 952a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, When the PRDY signal is held at a falling edge, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the falling state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set as the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. do. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 127, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is passed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 CR. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing in FIG. The EXS signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. . As described above, "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is HI (the EXS signal is held high), it should remain HIGH.

After step S764, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the ball-switching flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-switching operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[15-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, retry operation monitoring processing will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the retry operation of putting out the game balls that should have been put out is being performed normally.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. Rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the sensor history information storage area (step S770).

Following step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S772). This determination is to determine whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, as described above, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1 (step S774). This inconsistency counter INCC counts the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. , and normally the number of game balls received by the recess of the payout rotor and put out matches the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. Therefore, the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. The number of balls detected by the sensor 591 and the number of balls detected by the sensor 591 are monitored and judged by an inconsistency counter INCC as to whether or not inconsistent game balls are repeatedly put out. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. At step S774, the payout control program increments the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 or not.

When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts (decrements) the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by 1 (decrements, and step S778). ).

Following step S778, or when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability of one inconsistent game ball being put out by a retry operation is approximately one in several million. A value of 5 is set as

In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. , information used for this retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. With this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the value of the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration is restored to the value of the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored as the payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, the monitoring of the game ball payout operation (retry operation) by the payout device 580, which was performed until just before the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power restoration. there is Therefore, for example, immediately before an instantaneous power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination at step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally. It can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in a normal state, and even when the power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in a normal state. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S780 that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball dispensing operation by the dispensing device 580 is in an abnormal state. Therefore, even when the power is restored, it can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state by the determination in step S780.

If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program outputs a "retry error ”, the error LED display 860b, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 633, is set with retry error information to display the number “5”, and the payout control built-in RAM described above is set. is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that "prize balls are being stocked", the payout control program sets the prize ball stock information to display the number "9" on the error LED indicator 860b and incorporates the above-described payout control. It is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

Following step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, Triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor, it is initialized. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when power is turned on, triggered by the occurrence of this external factor. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 102 as the RAM clear signal. Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above, and sends the RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board shown in FIG. Output to 1510. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. are set to the value 0 respectively when operating normally).

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program displays retry error information (or prize ball stock information) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 as shown in FIG. Create a retry error state command in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), send it to the main control board 1310, and create LED display data in step S564 in the same process In the processing, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area. Based on this, a drive signal is output to the error LED indicator 860b, and the number "5" is displayed on this error LED indicator 860b. In the main control board 1310 having received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This peripheral control board 1510 outputs a door frame side lighting flashing command for outputting a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). is output to the frame-decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. A hall clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 as described above so that the error LED indicator 860b mounted on the payout control board 633 displays the number " 5” is displayed, it is possible to confirm that a “retry error” has occurred. As a result, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the hall clerk or the like can check for an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. The work can be performed very quickly compared to the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display contents of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified.

In addition, by intentionally setting the payout detection sensor 591 to a non-operating state, it is difficult to detect the game ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. Even if the retry action is forcibly generated and the game balls paid out by this retry action are fraudulently obtained, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold value INCTH. Then, since a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 emit light, hall clerk or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to stop the act so as not to be discovered, and cannot continue to acquire illegal game balls by the fraudulent act. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player who cheats is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, five balls. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally disabling the payout detection sensor 591 .

Furthermore, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC is set when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is designed to be initialized when an internal factor occurs. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor such as the operation of the operation switch 954 to clear the error occurs. Therefore, even if the operation switch 954 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a, the mismatch counter INCC may be forcibly initialized due to such fraud. No.

[15-10. Mismatch counter reset determination process]
Next, mismatch counter reset processing will be described. In this mismatch counter reset process, the number of game balls received by the recess of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted and paid out, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 , and determines whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between .

When the mismatch counter reset determination process is started, in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has passed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the aforementioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

When the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). This initialization sets the mismatch counter reset determination time to the initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours).

Following step S792, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S794), and this routine exit. The inconsistency counter INCC is, as described above, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the payout detection sensor 591 detects the number of game balls. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls received and the number of balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and paid out, the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591, matches, the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 139 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. An inconsistency counter INCC monitors and judges whether inconsistent game balls are repeatedly put out due to a discrepancy between the number of balls and the number of balls actually detected by the put-out detection sensor 591 . In the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability of one inconsistent game ball being put out by a retry operation is about one in several millions.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the game board 5 and a frame such as the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is mounted. Since it is configured so that the specifications can be changed, the payout control board 633 that controls the payout device 580 and the power supply board 630 that generates the drive power supply for the payout device 580 and the control power supply for the payout control board 633 have a common function. Equipped on the side of the body. In the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control program monitors the inconsistency counter INCC under the control of the payout control MPU 952a as described above, thereby determining whether or not the retry operation is repeated. It is possible to determine the operation, and in the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process shown in 129 (RAM work area power recovery setting), the process is restarted from the stored mismatch counter INCC when the power is turned on.

Then, when the power is cut off and the game board 5 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is replaced with a game board 5' having different game specifications from the game board 5 and the power is turned on, the payout control board is used. The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in 633 starts processing again from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. In other words, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5' mounted thereon, the inconsistency counter INCC of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 before replacement is inherited as it is. Therefore, when a player plays the pachinko machine 1 on which the game board 5' is mounted, there is a chance that the number of game balls that are inconsistent occurs with a probability of 1/several millions, and the inconsistency counter INCC is set. When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH, the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5' in a short period of time. There is a risk. In other words, in a short period after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5', an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, contact of various connectors, etc. There is a risk that the retry operation may be suddenly determined to be an abnormal operation even though no defect or the like has occurred.

In this way, when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5' and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replaced game board 5' is brand new but is likely to break down. It may give to the player. The probability that one inconsistent game ball is paid out due to the retry operation is one in several million, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and operated continuously during the opening hours of the hall for one week. Since it is the same as the probability that one inconsistent game ball is put out by the retry operation, in the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. It will be in a state where only the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, in one week, the mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1, and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 1. In two weeks, the mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by 1, and the mismatch counter INCC becomes 2 and 3. In the week, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 to become 3; in 4 weeks, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 to become 4; The value 1 is further incremented to the mismatch counter INCC, and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the mismatch threshold value INCTH. In other words, when five weeks have passed, the discrepancy counter INCC matches the discrepancy threshold value INCTH. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and there is an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, and poor contact of various connectors. etc. has occurred, and in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. Retry error information that displays the number "5" on the error LED indicator 860b, which is a device, is set and set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Therefore, when the payout control MPU 952a determines that the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S790 in the mismatch counter reset determination process, the mismatch counter reset is repeated every 7000 s (about 2 hours). By forcibly setting the value 0, that is, forcibly resetting the inconsistency counter INCC in the processing of step S794 in the determination process, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of 1/several millions is reduced. Disabled. As a result, although there is no abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, contact failure of various connectors, etc., an error occurs in the retry operation. It is possible to prevent setting (storing) of the retry error information to the effect that it is in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

In addition, by intentionally setting the payout detection sensor 591 to a non-operating state, it is difficult to detect the game ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotor to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. In the case where the payout detection sensor 591 is intentionally and repeatedly deactivated for a short period of time, even if a fraudulent act of forcibly generating a retry action and illegally obtaining the game balls put out by this retry action is performed, As described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC becomes greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 emit light. I will rush to confirm. Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to stop the act so as not to be discovered, and cannot continue to acquire illegal game balls by the fraudulent act. On the other hand, when the payout detection sensor 591 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long period of time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not exceed the mismatch threshold value INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is reset, but the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player who commits fraud during this time is up to the mismatching threshold value INCTH of the mismatching counter INCC, as described above, and the payout detection sensor 591 Even if the non-operating state is intentionally repeated for a long period of time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who cheats can be extremely reduced.

[15-11. Error release operation determination process]
Next, error cancellation operation determination processing will be described. In this error cancellation operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 124 is operated.

When the error cancellation operation determination process is started, in the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. is operated (step S800). This determination is performed based on the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the aforementioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area, and determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform error cancellation. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is instructed to cancel the error, and the operation switch 954 is operated. determined to be

When the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs error flag state confirmation processing. (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of error flags corresponding to various error information regarding the dispensing device 580 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is abnormal is checked.
As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (retry operation is normal). Since it is set, the payout control program confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a.

Following step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this status information setting process, based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the status information corresponding to the error flag is set to the above-described It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the built-in payout control RAM. As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main processing) shown in FIG. A state command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 1310 . For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, it indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 .

The main control board 1310 receives the retry error information and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the control board 1510, the sub-control program performs a retry operation error notification process for notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the retry operation error notification announcement of "Please check the prize ball unit" and "Please check the harness of the payout control board" is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment , 2 times.) The hall clerk or the like is notified by being repeatedly played from the loudspeaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper loudspeaker 573 shown in FIG. Upon hearing the error notification announcement of this retry operation, the hall clerk, etc., may notice an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. The failure can be confirmed very quickly compared to the case where the retry operation error notification announcement is not played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 . Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

Following step S804, the payout control program performs a release setting process (step S806). In this release setting process, based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, The CR unit 6 forcibly stops the content displayed by the error LED indicator 860b, which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 633, or indicates that the ball can be rented. , the logic of the PRDY signal described above is kept HI, that is, the raised state, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is connected from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a. and output to the CR unit 6 via. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the error LED indicator 860b has already displayed the error. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" that indicates that there is a "retry error", the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM is changed to "normal". Forcibly overwrite the information displayed with a figure "-" to notify that effect. In addition, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the game ball is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. It is output to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 .

Following step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and ends this routine. In this error flag initialization processing, based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the error flag is reset. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set as the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 127, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. .

As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value of the internal factor when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the judgment of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process with the occurrence of . Triggered by the occurrence, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on. Similar to the case where the switch 954 is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation switch 954 (operation switch), which was originally supposed to be used for canceling an error that has occurred in relation to the payout operation, is turned on to execute the main control side main processing from the time the power is turned on. Over a predetermined time until, instead, the operation unit for exhibiting the RAM clear function for starting the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) function as In addition, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 954 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred regarding the game ball payout operation after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the hall clerk is not accustomed to operating the pachinko machine, as long as he/she remembers the position of the operation switch 954 on the back of the game machine, it can be operated according to the timing of operating this operation switch 954. If a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the function of canceling an error that occurred regarding the game ball payout operation is exhibited. If it is within the time limit, the function of initializing the storage section can be exhibited. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a game machine, the hall clerk can handle the switch appropriately without hesitation because the efficiency of the switch operation is improved when dealing with the error, and the game is interrupted. The game can be restarted before the player who has been hit loses his or her desire to play.

[15-12. Exchanging various signals with the CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing during the payout operation by lending the ball will be described, and then the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls worth 200 yen (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and 25 balls worth 100 yen are dispensed twice) is used as the number of rental balls, , the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 will be described. The BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are stored in the input information read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the CR communication process confirms the logic states of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms, which is the interrupt timer period.

[15-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. When the PRDY signal is set to a logical state indicating that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. , the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, it is raised and held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a, and as PRDY, the game ball rental device connection terminal Output to CR unit 6 via plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player presses the rent button 328, the button 328 is switched on (turned ON), and this ball rent operation signal is TDS shown in FIG. It is input from the frequency display plate 365 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 . The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls worth 200 yen to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 as the number of rental balls. BRDY, which is a ball request signal, is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

In the payout control MPU 952a to which the BRDY signal is input, the payout control program changes from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (20 milliseconds (ms) to 58ms in this embodiment), as shown in FIG. 144(b). ) has passed, a predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls) is passed from the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 in one payout operation. , equivalent to 100 yen as an amount).

Of the number of game balls worth 200 yen, the CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls worth 100 yen to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 as the number of rental balls. ), BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, and the signal is It is raised and held (timing H2). This BRQ is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a as a BRQ signal.

As shown in FIG. 144(c), the payout control MPU 952a, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in this embodiment, is set to 20 ms±1 ms.), in order to notify that one payout operation has started, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the raised state is maintained and the payout control MPU 952a , and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 144(b), the CR unit 6, to which this EXS is input, waits until the lending instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, set to 20 ms to 58 ms) elapses from the timing H3. , BRQ raised and held from timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 144(c), the payout control MPU 952a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (which is set as the ball payout time in this embodiment) elapses. A predetermined number of rental balls, that is, the number of game balls worth 100 yen is put out to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 as the number of rental balls. When the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal raised and held from the timing H3 is set to LOW logic, that is, held in a fallen state and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. , EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

The CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen of the game balls worth 200 yen to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 as the number of rental balls. ), the BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board from the timing H5 until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, it is set to a maximum of 268 ms). 869, output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a), the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

When the payout control MPU 952a similarly pays out the number of game balls for the remaining 100 yen to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 as the number of rental balls using the above-described method, as shown in FIG. 144(c), , the raised and held EXS signal is set to LOW logic, that is, held in a lowered state and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and as EXS, a game ball lending device connection terminal Output to CR unit 6 via plate 869 (timing H7).

The CR unit 6 starts from timing H1 as shown in FIG. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The above-described lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are controlled by the payout control shown in FIG. It is clocked in the timer update process of step S552 in the part power-on process (payout control part main process).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 (the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is 144(d), the PRDY signal, which was raised and held at timing H1, is set to LOW, that is, in a fallen state. and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it rises and is held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and issued. It is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU 952a, and is output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. "Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held after falling), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( Maintain its logic HI when the EXS signal is held high.

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control section 633a in the payout control board 633. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for a circle twice, the game balls with the number of rental balls of 50 are put out to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加A setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 is operated by a hall clerk or the like, and the number of game balls worth 100 yen is used as the number of rental balls. When set to be put out to the lower tray 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen once, and the number of game balls worth 500 yen is set as the number of rental balls. When set to be put out to the upper tray 321 or the lower tray 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs the payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen five times, and determines the number of game balls worth 1000 yen. When the number of rental balls is set to be paid out to the upper tray 321 or the lower tray 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs the payout operation of 25 balls worth 100 yen ten times.

[15-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 keeps the CR unit 6 from receiving the BRQ from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 even after the above-described lending request monitoring time HA has passed. is output to the payout control board 633, and even if the signal is not started or the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has passed, the CR unit 6 connects the game ball lending device to the game ball lending device. If the signal is output to the payout control board 633 via the terminal plate 869 and the signal is not lowered, or even if the next request confirmation timing HE described above has passed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRQ to the game. If the signal is output to the payout control board 633 via the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF has passed, the CR unit 6 will be BRDY. is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and if the signal is not lowered, BRQ and Confirm whether BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, when the payout control MPU 952a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), as shown in FIGS. , 200 ms±1 ms.), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 633a while maintaining the fallen state. Then, as PRDY, it is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the lowered state is maintained and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J1 to HI after a predetermined period of time JB (in this embodiment, it is set to 200 ms±1 ms) from the timing J1. That is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while maintaining the raised state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2 ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from timing J2 to LOW after the elapse of a predetermined period JC (set to 100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J2. That is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while maintaining the lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3 ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J3 to HI after a predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J3. That is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while maintaining the raised state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4 ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from timing J4 to LOW after the lapse of a predetermined period JE (set to 100 ms±1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J4. That is, it is held in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5 ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a, after the lapse of a predetermined period JF (set to 10000ms±1ms in this embodiment) from the timing J5, sets the PRDY signal held down from the timing J5 to HI. That is, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a while maintaining the raised state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6 ).

The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are clocked in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[16. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 153. FIG. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 148 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, and FIG. 150 is a flow chart of LOCKN signal history creation processing 151 is a flow chart showing an example of connection abnormality determination processing, FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing an example of connection recovery processing, and FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal;

As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 comprises a peripheral control section 1511 and a liquid crystal display control section 1512. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control section 1511 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, and LOCKN signal. History creation processing, connection failure determination processing, and connection recovery processing will be described. The LOCKN signal history creation process is executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the connection abnormality determination process and the connection recovery process are performed when the peripheral control unit power is turned on, which will be described later. It is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the process, and the connection recovery process is executed following the connection abnormality determination process. In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[16-1. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 performs power-on processing of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing this peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs from the main control board 1310, shown in FIGS. 122 and 102. , various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) are compared, and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. The performance backup information (1 fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms), and the performance backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared, and the contents of the comparison are compared. 127, the performance backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. While performing a hot start by copying back the effect backup information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) to Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank0 (1 ms), when the compared contents do not match (i.e. , mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written into each of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is stored in Bank0 (SRAM) which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. 0 is forcibly written to cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 is forcibly written with a value of 0 to be zero cleared. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 105 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and effects display is performed so that the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information is obtained. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set brightness adjustment information. and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the effect display device 1600 that is present.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Sometimes, based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is adjusted and lit, and the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 When the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is lit at the luminance of 80%, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is lighted after adjusting the luminance based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. In this liquid crystal display device brightness setting process, the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the effect display device 1600 according to the use time of the effect display device 1600 is not performed at all. It's becoming This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. there is

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process to be described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by the lamp data generation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab are transferred byte by byte to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and via the peripheral bus 1511ai, by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 410 etc. is operated based on the detection signal from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. determine as appropriate whether or not to reflect

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. Output to effect display device 1600 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the effect display device 1600 . Note that in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the effect display device 1600 is canceled. It has become. Although this makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropped frames may occur. Various effects from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that allows you to prioritize synchronization with the production of combined music and sound effects.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data into differential serial data with a positive signal and a negative signal, and sends the data to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, not only music and effect sounds matching various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but also notification sounds and notification sounds are stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the first screen data is stored in the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the top light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler updating process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program, the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, various Various commands received in the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the performance control program generates screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound. The schedule data for generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, starting mouth winning command for instructing the start of the starting mouth winning effect, the number of normal symbols pending Normal pattern storage command for identifying (0 to 4), pattern synchronization production start command for instructing the start of the pattern synchronization production, pattern storage command output when the number of starting reservations changes, large winning opening 2005 A large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, It analyzes (command analysis means) whether it is a full tank error generation command or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present. In addition, this effect control program, after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on, the command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a body frame open command, a body frame close command, a door open command or a door frame close Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands, shown in FIG. , various commands classified as related to normal figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 102, door frame open command , door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the second error cancellation command), frame status 1 command (equivalent to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are grouped, various commands that are grouped into test-related, and various commands that are grouped into others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are stored in the peripheral control unit 1511. It extracts from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the presentation display device 1600 (rendering device), (rendering device), lamp (rendering device) is used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). By doing so, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent cheating on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the presentation control program is stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the effect display device 1600. Rendering data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁Control the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and transmit the audio data as audio data serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low volume, the effect sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 become small. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of an abnormality or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, and the player is notified that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player. You can also

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and Effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db as effect backup information (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed. , and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the second backup area 1511dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 105, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed with the . When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 125 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control section steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when no part-stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In some cases, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, in step S1009 of the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the in-process flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) of FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. is executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 145 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

If the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by 1 (step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are transmitted. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. and the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created. 127 is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the received game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to a register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start sending byte data bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the rest of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The original position, movable position, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the control MPU 1511a and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When a determination is made, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. , that is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The drawing state is obtained by obtaining the frequency of abnormality and the occurrence state of abnormality between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display driving board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. be able to.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank 0 (1ms) which is a backup target includes a transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, a storage area 1511cag for the motor drive board side transmission data, and a storage area 1511cah for acquiring movable body information. , and effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb as effect backup information (1 ms). The control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa executes the peripheral control DMA controller. Copying the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb is specified as the request factor of 1511ac, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied to Bank0 (1 ms). ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously stored in units of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511cc (1 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600. In some cases, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is loaded into the reception buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 127 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the 1st byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the 2nd byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3rd byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and then the 3 bytes of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from a pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. in a sanding environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control unit 1511, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are Stored in the 1511cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 111, a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this judgment, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. Then, a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and includes it in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). 1511cc of the backup second area 1511cc. 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a predetermined address. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 105 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. is not output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 145 is started again.

As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control immediately before the power failure occurs. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 147 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creating process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

150, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. LOCKN-signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal (normal data). predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the transmission of the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted to the highest bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5.rarw.B4, B4.rarw.B3, B3.rarw.B2, B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted to the least significant bit B0 in such a manner that the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. , toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since a value of 1 or 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection error determination process]
Next, the connection abnormality determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral controller steady-state process of the peripheral controller power-on processing shown in FIG. 145 will be described. In this connection abnormality determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

132, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. FIG. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal output to notify that effect. and to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 (step S1522). This determination is to determine whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no abnormality between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (Step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and receiver is in an abnormal state. (to count the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

In step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the accumulated count determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the accumulated count. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the calculated cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not been established when the cumulative number of times it has been determined that an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag indicating whether or not an error has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the accumulated state has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0 respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection abnormality determination process shown in FIG. and to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update processing of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106 (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the order of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is indicated. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation progresses according to the screen generation schedule data. When performance is completed along with the data and updating of the pointer is all completed, it is determined that the schedule data for screen generation has not started. In addition, in this determination, whether it is a period during which the startup screen is displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or a period during which the performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration in the state of waiting for customers. It can be determined based on the schedule data for screen generation, and the period during which the start screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and the customer waiting state. When it is the period during which the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the start screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the customer waiting state When the performance display device 1600 is not performing a demonstration (merely waiting for customers), this routine is terminated as it is.

In step S1540, when the effect is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, this routine ends as it is, while in step S1540 When the presentation is completed and the pointer is completely updated, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 (step S1542). 132. As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is set to the door frame side rendering counter provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the same process each time the connection abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 132 is executed. Count up the number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even one.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver once, this process is performed as it is. While terminating the routine, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, even if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set when the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be in an error state reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag that indicates whether or not an error has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. is set to 0 when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection of , has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 . This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, when an error has certainly occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is executed. (step S1548) and terminate this routine. In this communication error display process, in order to reliably notify that an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is drawn. process. For example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a message is displayed that reads, "An abnormality has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display process, during the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period during which the performance display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed, An abnormality occurs between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation confirmation request to confirm whether or not there is, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 outputs a LOCKN terminal as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. , outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is judged that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and that effect is given. is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a notification sound (for example, " An error has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side.") is repeatedly played from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, it is also possible to perform a process of lighting all the LEDs for lighting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 .

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 107 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 126 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main control side timer interrupt processing etc. shown in FIG. 127, or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the game ball becomes a "jackpot", the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. There are 15 rounds, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), game balls enter the big winning opening 2005, and when the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), the round starts. Each time one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, from the main control board 1310 Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a left decorative pattern on the left side, a central decorative pattern on the center, and a right side. , the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is given to the player. can be recognized, and at this time, the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol indicator 1404 or the second special symbol indicator 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed even in the two special symbols. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are variably displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design become translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative design is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stop-displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right-hand decorative design correspond to the stop-displayed left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and started to be displayed in the first special symbol indicator 1404 or the second special symbol indicator 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120, The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design, which are started to be variably displayed and stopped displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

Peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 Upon receipt of a command from the main control board 1310 for conveying the result of the special lottery, the effect display device shown in FIG. 8 is displayed as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area 1600 (timing K0), the step in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update processing of S1020, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the pointer is updated to indicate whether the second screen data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the rendering progresses according to the schedule data for screen generation. Therefore, the schedule data for screen generation is activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped. 152 in the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. The determination in step S1540 in the recovery process forces the routine to end.

As a result, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is the value from the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the stop display. Even when it is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the receiver) connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is not performed even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. connection recovery processing is not performed, and the communication error display processing in step S1548 in the connection recovery processing is not performed. An error has occurred. Please call the store clerk." In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from IC SDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106, and the pointer is completely updated. Since it has ended, that is, while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated in the scheduler update process, and the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 152, which is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is the value 0, that is, when it has not been determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine ends as it is, while the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and communication is performed. When the value of the abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the accumulated number of times that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. Sometimes, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends. When an abnormality has certainly occurred in the connection with the receiver, the process advances to step S1548 in the same process, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600, the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side production receiver IC SDIC0 are connected. If there is at least one error in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in an error state. When the accumulated count does not reach the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the transmitter and When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in an abnormal state while performing processing to restore the connection with the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (In other words, when an abnormality has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display processing must be performed so that, for example, the display area of the effect display device 1600 shows "upper tray side liquid crystal display device An error has occurred. Please call a store clerk." The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is validated.

The variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again. In the interval period until the display area of the effect display device 1600, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, so as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter The LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which tells that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data, is validated, and the connection between the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is activated. , in other words, the cumulative number of cases in which an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and it has been determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the number of times has not reached the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. While performing processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in an abnormal state reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, If there is definitely an error in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process must be performed so that, for example, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays "Abnormality in the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side." has occurred. Please call a clerk."

When the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, so the left decorative design and the central decorative design are displayed. , and until the right side decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if there are times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display processing of step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "An error has occurred in the liquid crystal display on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started in the display area of the production display device 1600, and then stopped and displayed, and the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are changed again. During the interval period until the display is started, the LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is validated. During the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the production display device 1600 to the stop display, the drawing data received from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the data is abnormal, is invalidated. This is because the result of the stop display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the most interesting information for the player, and the player is given a profit. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state occurs, when the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the left decorative pattern is displayed. Until the design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed, even if the image of the effect drawn in the display area is disturbed due to the influence of noise etc. and cannot be drawn correctly, the effect will continue Instead of interrupting and recovering to a state where drawing can be performed correctly, by stopping and displaying the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the player is most interested. I have finished drawing some information.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the startup screen on the performance display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the performance in the customer waiting state. This is very different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period during which the display device 1600 is demonstrating. This LOCKN signal output request data is used during the period when the startup screen is displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the time when the performance display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed by the performance display device 1600. It is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the transmitter. This is sent as an operation confirmation request in order to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the connection with the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. The forced switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection so as to transmit the two signals when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . When the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d has a different data format. Output to the control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input. While it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, an abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 assuming that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, a notification image (for example, "An abnormality has occurred in the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side. Please call the store clerk.") is output to the effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source. At the same time, the door frame 3 controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to output a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is an abnormality in the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided in the As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred, assuming that there is no abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It can be determined that an abnormality has occurred assuming that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that an abnormality has occurred, it can execute communication error display processing in step S1548 in the connection recovery processing in FIG. 131 as notification processing. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an abnormality, it can notify the hall clerk or the like by executing the notification process. It is possible for a person to very easily check whether or not an abnormality has occurred before playing a game, and the check does not take much time. Therefore, anomalies can be found without much effort.

In addition, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for door frame side effects. When the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot be normally received by the receiver IC SDIC0, a communication error occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to notify that the drawn data is abnormal. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, generates a connection confirmation signal indicating the start of transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate the communication abnormality during the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect an abnormality due to an abnormality in image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the abnormality. Therefore, by discovering and eliminating the abnormality, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

Further, the door-frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which receives and outputs the image transmitted from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, receives the image transmitted from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A LOCKN signal, which is a communication abnormality occurrence signal that indicates that a communication abnormality has occurred between the image communication between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, is sent to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511, which is the effect control microprocessor. Since it can output to the control MPU 1511a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to display an image indicating that a communication error has occurred. A message "An abnormality has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a clerk." It has become. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an abnormality due to an abnormality in communication between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect so that the player can act as a hall clerk or the like. , or directly notify the hall clerk or the like who happens to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the hall clerk or the like can eliminate the abnormality at an early stage when the abnormality occurs. You can start working on it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play by detecting and eliminating the abnormality at an early stage.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one occurrence of an abnormality in the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating the communication abnormality during image communication when the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the accumulated state has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. , can be output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 Since the connection confirmation signal can be output repeatedly only during the period in which the game is not progressed by starting and displaying the stop display, the communication abnormality can be resolved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even once an abnormality in the connection between the performance receiver ICSDIC0 and the receiver, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the accumulated state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is generated to enable the LOCKN signal and eliminate the communication abnormality during the image communication. A connection confirmation signal is sent from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to inform the start of transmission to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 and plays the game. , the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect stops outputting the connection confirmation signal. (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It's like Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 By continuing to output a connection confirmation signal, which is a signal for resolving anomalies, only during the period in which the game is not progressing by starting and displaying a stop display, the communication anomalies can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 and stops displaying. Only during the period in which the progress of the game is not executed, when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. Even if the first special symbol or second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect that progresses on the display screen (disturbance of the image) is the main control of the main control board 1310 Every time the MPU 1310a restarts and ends the progress of the game (every time (interval period) between the timing K1 and the timing K2), it can be made to go in the direction of elimination.

According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 comprises the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 102 and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first start port 2002 and a second start port 2002, which are starting regions in which game balls fired by the ball shooting device 650 toward the game region 5a defined on the game board 5 are provided in the game region 5a. A main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 102, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 633 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 580 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 124 payout control MPU 952a is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store game information even after the power is turned off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further comprises an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 125 is performed, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is deleted. While outputting the main control MPU 1310a which is a game control microprocessor, the RAM clear signal of FIG. Then, a RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and turning on the power. The period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 136 as an error cancellation signal for canceling the error that occurred in the payout device 580 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, without outputting to the game control microprocessor. It also has an error cancellation function to output to a given payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 110 for erasing the information about is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 115 as a RAM clear signal for erasing the information related to the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor. Function and the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. is performed after the period) has passed, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. and an error canceling function to output to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor. 1 can be set. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error cancellation function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 3031]
The sensor signal input part of the panel relay board 3031 is connected to various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, the gate sensor 2401, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening. It is connected to the sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003 (magnetic detection sensor 4024 to be described later). Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. do.

Attempts to gain unfair profits by manipulating the falling state of game balls at will by bringing magnets (e.g., permanent magnets or electromagnets) closer to game balls hit into the game area in a game machine. There is no end to illegal gaming behavior.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming behavior and suppress fraudulent behavior by means of light-emitting means, sound alarms, etc., magnetism detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided corresponding to predetermined positions in the gaming area. there is

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 155 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 3031 . As shown, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with a voltage of +5V produced by a +5V production circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive element or the like, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when it does not detect magnetism of a predetermined value or more, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism of a predetermined value or more. not (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. A collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected via a connector CON1 to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 3031, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

The transistor STR is turned on by a voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS when the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detecting state in which magnetism is not detected, and current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor ITR1 of the panel relay board 3031 via the connector CON2. , +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 when the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage is in the off state.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the pull-up resistor NR1 as well as to one end of the resistor NR2, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor section corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output section 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which +12V is applied. The detection circuit unit 4164 is a circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR2 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 and to which +12 V is applied, and a transistor ITR1 having a base terminal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. is applicable.

Further, in the preceding stage of the detection circuit section 4164, a sensor signal input section 4162 is configured by a circuit configured by a connector CON1, a voltage output section 4163, a resistor IR1 and a transistor ITR0. Thus, the panel relay board 3031 is provided with the sensor signal input section 4162 and the detection circuit section 4164 .

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the transistor ITR1 is turned on by applying a voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal whose transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (OFF) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the output of voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the +12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). This turns on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Also, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The operation states of the magnetic sensor MGS, built-in transistor STR, transistor ITR0, transistor ITR1, and transistor NTR1 described above are shown in tabular form in FIG. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 3031, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on in the same manner as when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by a connector member, contact resistance occurs when the connector member corrodes or when dust enters the connector connecting portion. Connector members are classified into pin contact type and bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact portion terminal of the connector member. The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is opened, dust and the like are likely to enter from this portion.

Contact resistance is also generated when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when a game is played with a right hand, fine sliding wear occurs due to vibrations applied to the connector member from a specific portion of the game area where a large number of game balls flow down continuously in a concentrated manner. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member (connector CON1) electrically connecting the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 3031 operation will be described. For example, in FIG. 155, when a contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a dashed line. Incidentally, the magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times greater than when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 155, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

In other words, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 by current flowing through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. . Then, when the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input section 4162 arranged on the panel relay board 3031, there is a possibility of erroneously detecting the signal of the sensor when the contact resistance RR occurs.

[Embodiment 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 156 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the game machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 1 in this embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit configuration parts.

In addition, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is installed in a plurality of places in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the big winning port 2005, the out port 1126, etc. become.

The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment differs from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that a non-detection state (second state), even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side, A avoidance section 4166 for avoiding the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 is provided, and the voltage output section 4163 and the detection circuit section 4164 are electrically connected via the avoidance section 4166 .

The first embodiment is an example in which the avoidance unit 4166 is configured with a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connection. It is connected.

The anode terminal of Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit section 4164. Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2. A sensor signal input section 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the avoidance section 4166. FIG.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Also, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conducting state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal with the transistor NTR1 turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side. Also, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage (corresponding to a first voltage) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. This turns on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Also, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state exists, in the above example, when it determines that the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511, and processing such as outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by means of the effect display device 1600, an alarm lamp, sound, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state (second state) in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in Transistor STR turns on.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

In other words, a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector, and a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage. It will be applied to the cathode terminal of diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conducting state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0. That is, the avoidance section 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 .

The operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

Since this does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to fine sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

As in the conventional art, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command by or that a disconnection has occurred in the magnetic detection sensor 4024. . Also, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Embodiment 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 157 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the game machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit configuration parts.

In the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 includes a first resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and a second resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1 and whose other end is grounded. and a resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input section 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input section 4162 of FIG. It is different in that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example configured with a resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connecting portion. ing.

In the detection circuit section 4164, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which +12 V is applied to the other end, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2. A sensor signal input section 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the avoidance section 4166. FIG.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Also, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, a voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the transistor ITR1 is turned on by applying a voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal whose transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (OFF) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side.

A voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistor circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the avoidance section 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor of the avoidance section 4166 are applied. Current flows to ground via IR1 and a second resistor IR3. A potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 due to the current flowing through the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Also, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 157, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black dot as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

In other words, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage. 1 will be applied to one end of the resistor. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is summed and applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, which in turn flows to ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, the current resulting from the addition of a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage is substantially grounded. As a result, little current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 downstream of the second resistor IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is kept off. That is, the avoidance section 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 .

The operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

Since this does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to fine sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

[Embodiment 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 158 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the game machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 3 includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. Circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit configuration parts.

In this embodiment 3, the avoidance unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 and a resistor that constitute a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage that is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. It includes IR1, IR4 and IR5. Compared with the second embodiment described above, in the third embodiment, instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, a series-connected resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 forming the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example composed of a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0 of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0. One end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to the other end of which +12 V of the detection circuit section 4164 is applied, and are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal whose transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (OFF) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side.

A voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistor circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1 of the avoidance unit 4166, the resistor IR4, and the resistor IR5. Current flows to ground via IR5. A potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0 by the current flowing through the resistor IR4. As a result, the preceding stage transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the preceding transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. Due to the current flowing through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated across the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on.

When the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Also, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 158, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black dot as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

In other words, a voltage obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage due to the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. will be applied to one end of resistor IR1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage that is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of resistor IR1, current flows through resistor IR1 and through resistor IR4 and resistor IR5 to ground. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage drops to the ground, and most of the current flows to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the rear stage of the resistor IR1. do not flow. Therefore, the preceding transistor ITR0 is not turned on. In addition, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit remain off. That is, the avoidance section 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 .

The operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change). False detection can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input sections 4162 respectively connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input sections 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 is turned off.

Similarly, when one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input section 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input section 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on, and the detection circuit section 4164 is turned on. transistor ITR1 is turned off. Further, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output section 4163 is provided for each of these sensors, and the voltage output section 4163 provided respectively is a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, "TD62083AP" (commercially available, manufactured by TOSHIBA). (manufactured) can be used.

The sensor signal input section 4162 provided on the panel relay board 3031 of the present embodiment has been described above, but the detection sensor that can be applied to the sensor signal input section 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024. Various sensors, for example, general prize winning opening sensor 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, vibration detection sensor, contact A sensor or the like can be applied.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described by showing Examples 1 to 3. However, unless the gist of the present invention, that is, the circuit configuration provided with the avoidance unit 4166 is changed, the voltage output unit 4163, The positions on the substrate where the avoidance unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged can be selectively changed and arranged as necessary. Several variations of the arrangement example are shown below.

[Example 4]
FIG. 161 shows an example in which the detection circuit section 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310 . In this example, a voltage output section 4163 , an avoidance section 4166 , and a signal relay transistor ITR 0 are arranged on the panel relay board 3031 . The basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 161, the collector terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the panel relay board 3031, the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of the detection circuit section 4164 of the main control board 1310, and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 are connected to the connector CON2. are electrically connected by

[Example 5]
FIG. 162 shows another example in which the detection circuit section 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. FIG. In this example, the voltage output section 4163 and the avoidance section 4166 are arranged on the panel relay board 3031, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 is moved to the main control board 1310 and provided in front of the detection circuit section 4164. there is The basic electrical connection of the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 162, the anode terminal of Zener diode ZD0 forming avoidance portion 4166 of panel relay board 3031 and the base terminal of transistor ITR0 for signal relay of main control board 1310 are electrically connected by connector CON2. are connected.

In the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 161 and the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 162, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are harnesses having connector members at both ends (simply referred to as CON2 in FIG. 157). ) are electrically connected. For this reason, there is a possibility that contact resistance may occur at the connector connecting portion as well. Therefore, in order to avoid erroneous detection of the signal due to this contact resistance, as a modified embodiment of the fourth embodiment, a pull-up resistor NR1 having +12 V applied to one end thereof is added to the rear stage of the connector member CON2 in terms of the circuit. Similar to the avoidance portion 4166, another avoidance portion may be provided between the connection point between the end and the signal line connected to the connector member CON2 and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. According to this, erroneous detection of signals can be further reduced, and the reliability of signal detection is increased.

The present invention is explained using an example in which the detection circuit section 4164 is composed of the pull-up resistor IR2 and the transistor ITR1 to one end of which +12V is applied in the fourth and fifth embodiments. Essentially, this means that the logic (whether HI level active or LOW level active) input to the main control MPU 1310a connected to the subsequent stage is selected to select the one that is advantageous in terms of control. Therefore, a circuit consisting of a pull-up resistor IR2 and a transistor ITR1 is provided as the detection circuit section 4164, which is arranged in the preceding stage of the main control input circuit 1310a.

However, the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1, to which +12 V is applied to one end, is connected to the signal line, the base terminal is connected to the rear stage of the signal line via the resistor NR2, the emitter terminal is grounded, and A main control input circuit 1310a itself having a collector terminal connected to an input port (not shown) substitutes for the detection circuit section 4164 (in other words, a circuit functioning as the detection circuit section 4164, that is, a main control input circuit 1310a). The control input circuit 1310a can be used for detection), but the present invention is fully realized.

[Example 6]
FIG. 163 shows an example in which the avoidance section 4166 and the detection circuit section 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310 . The signal relay transistor ITR0 is also moved to the main control board 1310 and provided in the front stage of the detection circuit section 4164. FIG. The basic electrical connection of this sixth embodiment is the same as that of the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 163, the signal line leading to the connector CON1 to which the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 3031 is connected and the avoidance section 4166 of the main control board 1310 are configured. A cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is electrically connected by a connector CON2.

When the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are circuit-configured as in the above-described fourth to sixth embodiments, the panel relay board 3031 is used as a detection sensor section (in this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is used). There is an advantage that commonality is possible regardless of the type of

From the standpoint of ease of assembly, it is desirable to use a relay board, but the convenience of the first start sensor 3002 and the second start sensor 2402 provided at the start gate that brings the player to the lottery is not considered. Even if it is missing, it may be better to directly connect the main control board 1310 with a connector without providing a circuit element on the relay board from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. In such a case, the configuration of the seventh embodiment works well.

[Example 7]
FIG. 164 shows an example in which the voltage output section 4163, avoidance section 4166, and detection circuit section 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. FIG. In this example, the signal relay transistor ITR0 is also moved to the main control board 1310 and provided in the front stage of the detection circuit section 4164 . The basic electrical connection of this seventh embodiment is the same as that of the circuit shown in FIG. Also, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 164, the panel relay board 3031 is formed only with signal lines (for example, printed wiring) for simply relaying signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 . The signal line is electrically connected to the connector CON1 of the main control board 1310 by a harness connected to a connector on the panel relay board 3031 . That is, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 of the main control board 1310 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is built in via the connector CON1 and the panel relay board 3031 in the preceding stage of the connection part. is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR.

In FIG. 164, a relay board provided with only connectors (CON3, CON4) is used, but the output of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 can be directly connected to the main control board 1310 without using a relay board. can also

Even with the configurations shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7], the provision of the avoidance unit 4166 does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 (because there is no voltage change), so the connector member When contact resistance occurs due to fine sliding wear or the like, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance.

In the seventh embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 through the connector CON3 (represented by a square in the figure) provided on the panel relay board 3031. It is electrically connected to a connector member CON1 provided on the main control board 1310 through a connector CON4 (represented by a square in the figure) provided on the main control board 1310 . Therefore, there is a possibility that contact resistance will occur at three points, ie, connector CON3, connector CON4, and connector CON1.

In consideration of this, the contact resistance caused by the loosening of the connection portions (CON3 and CON4 indicated by squares in the figure) of the panel relay board 3031 and the voltage due to the current flowing through the contact resistance RR of the connector CON1 portion Even if the voltage added by the contact resistance generated at each of the three connector connection portions described above is added to the second voltage in the second state of the detection sensor portion (magnetic detection sensor 4024), the avoidance portion 4166 is selected and provided to avoid the predetermined voltage acting on sensing circuitry 4164 . This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164, so when contact resistance occurs due to fine sliding wear of each connector member, etc., it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance. can be done.

In addition, in the configurations shown in [Embodiment 4] to [Embodiment 7], the Zener diode ZD0 is used as the avoidance unit 4166, but the avoidance unit 4166 is not limited to the Zener diode ZD0. The avoidance unit 4166 in FIG. 157 (Example 2) and the avoidance unit 4166 in FIG. 158 (Example 3) can be used.

The panel relay board 3031 shown in Embodiment 7 is formed only with signal lines (for example, by printed wiring) for simply relaying signals from the detection sensor units, so signals from a plurality of detection sensor units are formed. There is an advantage that the panel relay board 3031 collects them independently, forms printed wiring so as to combine them into one connector member, and connects them to the main control board 1310 through a connector.

[Electrical connection of detection sensor unit, panel relay board and main control board]
Next, electrical connections among the detection sensor section 4000, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 165 is a block diagram mainly showing the basic configuration of the electrical connection between the detection sensor section, the panel relay board and the main control board. The detection sensor unit 4000 is a general term for various detection sensors arranged at predetermined positions on the game board 5. A starting opening sensor 2402, a big winning opening sensor 2403, a vibration detection sensor, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 (reference numeral 3003 in FIG. 102), etc. correspond to this.

The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, and is a board on which a main control MPU 1310 serving as a control subject is mounted. The panel relay board 3031 is a board that relays the detection signal of the detection sensor section 4000 to the main control board 1310 .

The detection sensor section 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 3031 . Further, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are connected by a connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and a connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 as a harness having connectors for connection at both ends. are electrically connected by connector connection. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector members 4501 and 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board. A signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

[Arrangement positions of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in the gaming machine]
FIG. 166 is a front view schematically showing each example of arrangement positions of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 166(A) to 166(D), the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are located at the rear of the game board 5, which is not visible to the player, and are basically an effect display device (for example, , liquid crystal display) 1600 (see FIG. 100, not shown). Reference numeral 180 denotes a handle unit which is provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 and the like and is operated by the player. It is a pressing operation part that is pressed by the player for effect.

In FIG. 166(A), the main control board 1310 is arranged in the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 3031 is located in the lower rear part of the game board 5 and to the right of the main control board 1310 in front view. It shows the arrangement pattern that is arranged. In FIGS. 166(A) to 165(D), specifically, a box attached to the rear surface of a plate-like transparent game panel 1100 (see FIGS. 100 and 101) that defines the rear end of the game area 5a The panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 having a shape.

In FIG. 166(B), the panel relay board 3031 is arranged in the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 is located in the lower rear part of the game board 5 and to the right of the panel relay board 3031 in front view. It shows the arrangement pattern that is arranged. In FIG. 166(C), the main control board 1310 is arranged in the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 3031 is located in the lower rear part of the game board 5 and to the left of the main control board 1310 in front view. It shows the arrangement pattern that is arranged.

166(A) to 166(C), the positional relationship of the panel relay board 3031 with respect to the main control board 1310 in the front-rear direction is the same layer as the main control board 1310 or the panel relay board in front of the main control board 1310. 3031 is located.

FIG. 166(D) shows an arrangement pattern in which the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 are superimposed in the front-rear direction in the center of the lower rear part of the game board 5 . In FIG. 166(D), the panel relay board 3031 is arranged in front of the main control board 1310 . As shown in FIGS. 166(A) to 166(D) described above, the arrangement of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 is determined according to various conditions.

The detection sensor section 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 via a connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 3031 . Further, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are connected by a connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and a connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 as a harness having connectors for connection at both ends. are electrically connected by connector connection. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector members 4501 and 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board. A signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

Therefore, the embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance, as well as The present invention relates to a game machine in which an avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of the positional relationship between a vibration source and a control board.

[Arrangement example of avoidance unit]
FIGS. 167(A) to 167(C) are diagrams showing layout examples of the avoidance unit 4510 with respect to the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310. FIG. The avoidance unit 4510 represents a circuit configuration including an avoidance unit 4166 for avoiding voltage addition due to contact resistance generated in the connector member. 156 to 158, the avoidance part 4166 is the circuit part arranged in the front stage of the avoidance part 4166. In the circuit part, the connection state of the connector member becomes loose, and the contact resistance is generated in this part. By doing so, even if the voltage is added due to the contact resistance, the effect of the added voltage on the detection circuit unit arranged after the avoidance unit 4166 is avoided.

As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the possibility of erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000 increases due to the contact resistance of the connector member. However, as shown in FIGS. 166(A) to 166(D), the layout of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 is usually determined by various conditions. At that time, it is often the case that consideration is not given to arranging each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, the influencing sources of vibration include collision between the game ball and the game ball guideway member arranged in the right side area of the game area 5a for hitting to the right, as well as, for example, a production button (operation button). The hitting operation of the ball launcher, the ball hitting operation of the ball hitting hammer of the ball launching device, the sound of the high output speaker, and the like.

Therefore, the embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances, and an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance generated by looseness of the connector member. In addition to providing the unit 4510, the avoidance unit 4510 is appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source.

FIG. 167(A) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the panel relay board 3031. When vibration is applied to the connector member 4501 that electrically connects the detection sensor section 4000 and the panel relay board 3031, the connector is Even if the member 4501 is loosened and contact resistance is generated due to this loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the addition of voltage due to the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. is.

FIG. 167(B) shows an example in which an avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the main control board 1310, and the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 is vibrated. Even if the connector member 4502 or 4503 is loosened by the application of the voltage and the contact resistance is generated due to the loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the addition of the voltage due to the contact resistance. This avoids erroneous detection of the output signal.

FIG. 167(C) shows an example in which avoidance units 4510 are provided on both the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310, respectively. When vibration is applied to the member 4501, and when vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310, the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502, or the connector Even if the member 4503 is loosened and contact resistance is generated due to this loosening, the voltage adding action due to the contact resistance is avoided by the avoidance unit 4510, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. In addition, it avoids erroneous detection of the signal relayed and output from the panel relay board 3031 .

[Specific example of vibration generation source and arrangement example of avoidance unit 4510]
168(A) to 168(F) are diagrams showing a specific example of the vibration generation source in the pachinko machine 1 and an arrangement example of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310. FIG. It should be noted that in each figure, a member that is a source of vibration is indicated by a hatched portion. 168(A) to 168(C) show a game in which a large number of right-handed game balls are continuously concentrated and flow down to the right side area of the game area 5a when playing right-handed. An example is shown in which the ball guideway unit 4200 is provided, and if the vibration from the game ball guideway unit 4200 is applied to the connector member and micro-sliding wear occurs, contact resistance may occur due to this. there is

In the case of the game machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168(A), when the vibration source is the collision between the game board 5 and the game ball due to right-handed hitting, the panel is attached to the game ball guideway unit 4200 which is the vibration source. Since the relay boards 3031 are arranged close to each other, the connector member [the connector member 4501 shown in FIG. 167(A)] of the panel relay board 3031 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167(A)].

In the case of the game machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. Since the control boards 1310 are arranged close to each other, the connector member [the connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 167(B)] of the main control board 1310 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167(B)].

In the case of the game machine with the substrate arrangement shown in FIG. Considering that the control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 are arranged close to each other, the connector members of either board [the connector members 4501, 4502 and 4503 shown in FIG. susceptible to Therefore, avoidance units 4510 are arranged on both the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167(C)].

FIG. 168D shows the case where the vibration source is the pressing operation section 303 . For example, when the player concentrates too much on the game and performs a hitting operation by forcefully pressing the pressing operation unit 303, or during a specific effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a message of "Consecutive hits", and the player recognizes the message. As a result, when the player hits the pressing operation part 303 continuously, when the source of the vibration is the operation of the pressing operation part 303 for presentation, the pressing operation part 303 becomes the vibration generation source. case is assumed. In contrast to such a case, in FIG. 168(D), the main control board 1310 is arranged close to the pressing operation unit 303 which is the source of vibration, so the connector member of the main control board 1310 [FIG. The connector member 4503 shown in (B)] is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167(B)].

167(A) to 167 in the case of the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168(B) to FIG. The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in (C) can be adopted.

FIG. 168(E) shows the case where the vibration source is the ball hitting mallet 543 of the ball launching device 540 (see FIG. 10 for the specific arrangement position). For example, in a right-handed game, it is assumed that the hitting force (spring force) against the game ball shot by the ball hitting mallet 543 of the ball shooting device 540 increases, and the impact at this time becomes a source of vibration. 168(E), the panel relay board 3031 is arranged close to the ball hitting mallet 543 which is the source of vibration, so the connector member of the panel relay board 3031 [FIG. The connector member 4501 shown in A)] is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167(A)].

Not only in the case of the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168(E), but also in the case of the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIGS. 167(C) to FIG. 167C can be employed.

FIG. 168(F) shows a case where the vibration generation source is the body frame speaker 622 for sound output (see FIG. 79 for specific placement positions). For example, a high-volume sound effect is output from the main body frame speaker 622 in order to liven up the gaming state during a specific effect, and the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 at this time is assumed to be the source of vibration. In contrast to such a case, in FIG. 168(F), the panel relay board 3031 is arranged close to the main body frame speaker 622, which is the source of vibration. The connector member 4501 shown in (A)] is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167(A)].

Not only in the case of the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168(F), but also in the case of the gaming machine with the board arrangement shown in FIGS. , the layout patterns of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 167A to 167C can be adopted.

The member which becomes the vibration generation source shown above is not limited to one in the pachinko machine 1 . For example, a member including a game ball guide path unit 4200 and a ball hitting mallet 543, a game ball guide path unit 4200 and a pressing operation section 303, and the like, which serve as vibration sources depending on the game state. is also expected to change. That is, a game machine having a plurality of members serving as vibration sources is assumed. Even in that case, any of the layout patterns of the avoidance unit units 4510 shown in FIGS. 167(A) to 167(C) can be adopted.

As described above, the avoidance unit 4510 can be appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit 4510, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from the member that is the vibration source, even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to the contact resistance It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from 4000 and panel relay board 3031 .

As described above, when signal transmission is performed by a connector member, contact resistance occurs when the connector member corrodes or dust enters the connector connecting portion. Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when the connector member is subjected to vibration from a specific portion of the game area where a large number of game balls flow down in a continuous concentration, such as when playing right-handed, this causes contact resistance. There is fear.

If a current flows through the contact resistance caused by such a cause, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance rises, and there is a risk that an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state will enter the detection circuit. be. That is, there is a possibility of erroneously detecting the signal of the detection sensor.

Therefore, it is necessary to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance. As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, there is a high risk of erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor. However, usually, the layout of the panel relay board and the main control board on the game board is determined according to various conditions. At that time, it is often the case that consideration is not given to arranging each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, influencing sources of vibration include, in addition to the above-mentioned collision between the game board and the game ball due to right-handed hitting, for example, the hitting operation of the production button, the hitting action of the ball-striking hammer of the ball launching device, the high For example, a loud volume output from a speaker may be used.

Therefore, the embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to provide an avoidance unit that avoids erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance. The present invention relates to a game machine in which an avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of a positional relationship with a vibration source.

The above-described embodiments can be summarized as the following technical means.

The game machine according to [means 1] is
Equipped with a detection sensor section arranged at a predetermined position on a game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying the detection signal of the detection sensor section to the main control board. In order to solve the above problems,
A game ball guiding path unit is arranged in the right side area of the game area where the game ball is hit to the right, and the game ball is continuously hit to the right when the game ball is hit to the right.
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is arranged close to the game ball guideway unit, and either the main control board or the panel relay board has contact resistance generated in the connector member. an avoidance unit is provided for avoiding the additive action of voltages,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine according to [Means 1], the avoidance unit is appropriately attached to either one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the game ball guideway unit that is the source of vibration. can be placed in In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from the member that is the vibration source, and contact resistance is generated due to this, even if contact resistance is generated, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

A gaming machine according to [means 2] includes a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on a game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of a game, and relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In a game machine equipped with a panel relay board,
Having an operation button that allows a player to perform a predetermined operation for production,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A board having the connector member is arranged in the vicinity of the operation button, and a voltage due to contact resistance generated in the connector member is added to either the main control board or the panel relay board. an avoidance unit is provided for avoiding the action,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine according to [Means 2], the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on either one of the panel relay board and the main control board, taking into consideration the positional relationship with the operation button that is the source of the vibration. be able to. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from the member that is the vibration source, and contact resistance is generated due to this, even if contact resistance is generated, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The game machine according to [means 3] is
A game comprising a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on a game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of a game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. on the machine,
a ball shooting device for shooting game balls into a game area in response to operation of a ball hitting handle; at least one of the main control board and the panel relay board having a connector member;
A board having the connector member is arranged in the vicinity of the ball-striking mallet of the ball launching device, and either the main control board or the panel relay board has contact resistance generated in the connector member. an avoidance unit is provided for avoiding the additive action of the voltage due to
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine according to [means 3], the avoidance unit is mounted on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship between the ball launching device, which is the source of the vibration, and the ball hitting mallet. can be properly placed. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from the member that is the vibration source, and contact resistance is generated due to this, even if contact resistance is generated, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

The game machine according to [means 4] is
A game comprising a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on a game board, a main control board for controlling progress of a game, and a panel relay board for relaying a detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. on the machine,
having a speaker for sound output,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member,
A circuit board having the connector member is arranged close to the speaker, and a voltage addition action is applied to either the main control circuit board or the panel relay circuit board due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid
It is characterized by

According to the game machine according to [means 4], considering the positional relationship of the high-output speaker as a vibration source, the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on either one of the panel relay board and the main control board. can do. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from the member that is the vibration source, and contact resistance is generated due to this, even if contact resistance is generated, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

According to the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, the avoidance unit can be appropriately arranged on either one of the panel relay board and the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the game member that is the source of vibration. can. In addition, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit, even if the connector member is loosened due to vibration from the member that is the vibration source, and contact resistance is generated due to this, even if contact resistance is generated, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from the panel relay board.

Not limited to the above-mentioned circumstances, in recent game machines, it is common to provide a plurality of movable effects (movable accessories) that are electrically driven by drive sources such as motors and solenoids used for effects. . These movable accessories tend to increase in volume and range of motion, and the range of motion and, depending on the item, the speed of motion also tend to expand, and the method of moving them is becoming more complicated at present. Therefore, it is conceivable that the movable accessory itself becomes a source of vibration, causing looseness in the connector member and thereby causing contact resistance. Even in such a case, the embodiment of the present invention can avoid erroneous detection of signals from the detection sensor unit and the panel relay board due to contact resistance.

By the way, if the plurality of movable accessories are not at the initial positions, there is a possibility that the predetermined production cannot be started normally.

For this reason, in order to reliably grasp the initial position of the movable effect body, an origin position detection sensor (a photo sensor consisting of a set of a light projecting type and a light receiving type is often used) is installed directly inside the movable effect body or the driving motor. According to the type, these detection signals are fed back to the control body and used for control. The exchange of electrical signals between the control board for performance and the drive board is also realized by the connector member and the harness connecting them.

Since many specific illustrations have already been made, the illustration is omitted. (Initial position), the effect movable body divided into left and right at the center of the game area 5a is combined at the center of the game panel, or the initial position at the lower center of the game area 5a (back of the big winning opening unit, etc.) Depending on the model and version, the arrangement position changes in various ways to appeal the uniqueness of the game machine, such as one moving upward.

Now, if it becomes impossible to correctly transmit and receive the drive data and each signal for operating it, and the origin detection signal, it is assumed that there is a risk that error detection will not be possible and that erroneous transmission will occur. . Here, it is considered to provide the avoidance unit 4166 described above on the drive board after the origin position detection sensor in the transmission direction, or to provide it on the signal input side of the peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) on the control side. be.

As described above, even in the event that at least two movable members are rapidly united, it is expected that the vibration due to the collision at that time will be strongly transmitted, and in this case as well, it is necessary to take appropriate countermeasures. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 169(C), when the left and right movable members shown by hatching are combined at the center of the game board 5 to perform intense heat production, the arrangement position of the peripheral control board and the left and right It becomes necessary to consider the location of the sensor for detecting the origin position of the production movable body.

[Electrical Connection of Origin Position Detection Sensor, Drive Board, and Peripheral Control Board for Controlling It]
FIG. 169(A) shows a basic configuration mainly for electrical connection of the peripheral control board 1510, the panel relay board 3031 (drive board), the driving means, and the origin position detection sensor 4000 for detecting the origin position of the movable effect body. is a block diagram showing

A peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the performance, and is a board on which a peripheral control unit 1511 serving as a main body of performance control is mounted. The panel relay board 3031 (drive board) is also a board that relays the detection signal of the origin position detection sensor section 4000 to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 is for performing the main control for the effect, and the panel relay board 3031 (driving board) outputs the drive data output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the drive source and at least the movable effect body. , the input information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 uses this information for control. A panel relay board 3031 (driving board) is for supplying a driving current corresponding to a driving signal to the driving means, and also serves as an origin for detecting an initial position for supplying a driving current corresponding to a movable effect body. Position detection is transferred to the panel relay board 3031 (drive board). As shown in FIG. 169(A), transmission and reception of these control signals are performed by electrical connection by connector members 4504, 4505, and 4506. FIG.

Since there are various positional relationships between the movable members for producing the vibration generation source and the connector members that connect the peripheral control board 1510 or the panel relay board 3031 (driving board) and the origin position detection sensor, one of them is " The avoidance unit 4150 is arranged in consideration of the appropriate influence of whether the loosening of the connector connection due to vibration occurs. They can be appropriately arranged as shown in FIG. 169(A) or FIG. 169(B). As a result, even if the connector member loosens due to vibration from the member that is the vibration source, and contact resistance is generated due to this, the signal from the origin position detection sensor 4000 and the drive substrate will be erroneous due to the contact resistance. It is possible to evade detection.

It should be noted that when moving the movable accessory, looseness of the connector connection in the drive means, the origin position detection sensor, the drive board, and the peripheral control board, which are connected by the connector, was considered a problem. , sphere launchers, and speakers are also considered to be sources of vibration.

[Grouping of movable characters for multiple productions]
As described above, a game machine is generally provided with a plurality of movable effects (movable accessories) that are electrically driven by drive sources such as motors and solenoids used for effects. These movable accessories tend to increase in volume and range of motion, and the range of motion and, depending on the item, the speed of motion also tend to expand, and the method of moving them is becoming more complicated. Furthermore, the movable range of each different movable accessory may intersect.

For example, if one of the plurality of movable accessories fails to return to its initial position, which is the start of the action when the production starts, the operating states of the other movable accessories are hardly taken into consideration. The current situation is that they are not. If the return action is performed only with the movable accessory in which an abnormality has occurred without considering the other movable accessories, there is a risk of interfering with the other movable accessories. If this happens, there is a risk that the player will feel uneasy and lose interest in the game.

Here, in order to use the movable accessories for the production, it is necessary to restore all the movable accessories to their initial positions. In addition, if the accessory is unintentionally stopped at a location other than the initial position for some reason, the action to restore the movable accessory to the initial position is performed. If you do not consider that the movable ranges of movable accessories intersect with each other as in , when performing a recovery operation, physically interfere with other movable accessories and restore all movable accessories to their initial positions. may become impossible. It should be noted that in such a case, due to the physical interference of the movable accessory, a large vibration that is different from usual may occur. In the substrate 1510, erroneous detection of the detection signal of the sensor can be avoided.

Therefore, in the embodiments described below, in order to reliably restore the initial positions of a plurality of character objects, movable character objects whose movement ranges physically interfere with each other are collectively managed as one group. , the movable accessories in the group will not physically interfere with each other during the recovery operation to each initial position, which is the position where each movable accessory starts the action for the start of the production. By performing the return operation in a predetermined operation sequence as described above, it is possible to reliably perform the restoration from a position other than the initial position.

In the following embodiments, each of the plurality of movable accessories is movable within a motion range from an initial position at which motion for effect is started to an operating position until motion for effect ends. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each of the plurality of movable parts is divided into a plurality of groups in which the motion ranges of the respective movable parts do not interfere with each other, and in at least one group, the motion ranges are mutually different. Contains multiple interfering movable parts.

In addition, each of the plurality of movable accessories has an initial position detection sensor (for example, a photosensor) that detects at least an initial position set in advance. In addition to the initial position detection sensor capable of detecting the motion start position for the performance, the position detection sensor may further include a position detection sensor that detects the middle position of the motion range and the end position of the motion range. good. The peripheral control board 1510 can set even one of a plurality of movable objects in a group including a plurality of movable objects whose motion ranges interfere with each other to a predetermined position (initial position, intermediate position, or end point position) as described above. is not detected, the movable accessories do not physically interfere with each other during the restoration operation to the respective initial positions that are the starting positions of the operations for starting the production. All the movable accessories in the group are restored to their initial positions according to a predetermined operation sequence.

FIG. 170 is a front view conceptually showing, for example, a plurality of movable accessories for production arranged in the back production unit 3100 and grouping of the plurality of movable accessories. As shown in FIG. 170, a role group 01 (reference numeral 5000) is arranged in the center of the pachinko machine 1, and a role group 02 (reference numeral 5002) is arranged in the right side of the pachinko machine 1. A character group 03 (reference numeral 5004) is arranged on the left side of the pachinko machine 1, a character group 04 (reference numeral 5006) is arranged approximately in the upper center of the pachinko machine 1, and approximately in the lower center of the pachinko machine 1. is provided with a character group 05 (reference numeral 5008). That is, the pachinko machine 1 has five role groups.

The five character object groups 01 to 05 are designed not to physically interfere with each other within the operating range. More specifically, the role group 01 is composed of a mask role, a body deformation left role, a body deformation right role, a body storage-appearance role, an upper liquid crystal drive role, and a lower liquid crystal drive role. there is The character group 02 consists only of the right shoulder character, the character group 03 consists of only the left shoulder character, the character group 04 consists of only the face character, and the character group 05 consists of only the pop-up character. It is

Therefore, the movable accessories that physically interfere with each other in the motion range for presentation are grouped together. In the above example, the mask role, the body deformation left role, the body deformation right role, the body storage-appearance role, the upper liquid crystal drive role, and the lower liquid crystal drive role, which belong to the role group 01, are in the same operation range. are supposed to interfere with each other.

[Recovery operation to the initial position of the movable accessory (referred to as accessory correction operation)]
When even one of the movable accessories in the role product group has an abnormality, all the movable accessories in the group are operated in a predetermined operation sequence to restore the initial position. For example, when the state changes or when the fluctuation starts, check the photo state of all motors, and if there seems to be a problem (for example, if it is detected that it is not in the initial position), the role group to which the motor belongs By using motor sequence data for correcting operation for all the accessories, the accessories are restored to the correct positions.

In this embodiment, only one movable accessory belongs to each of the accessory groups 02 to 05. do not physically interfere with each other, the character object correction operation may be performed in parallel for each character object group. As for the role object group 01, since there are six movable roles belonging to the role object group 01, it is determined in advance so that the movable role objects in the group do not physically interfere with each other during the recovery operation to the initial position. must be performed in a specified sequence of operations.

An example of the role product correction operation in the role product group 01 will be described below. In this example, the peripheral control board 1510, when there is an abnormality in which even one of the plurality of movable accessories belonging to the accessory group 01 has an abnormality in which the initial position is not detected, physically performs a recovery operation to the initial position. All the movable accessories in the group are operated according to a predetermined operation sequence so as not to interfere with each other, and are restored to their initial positions.

More specifically, if even one of the movable accessories in the accessory group 01 is determined to have a photo abnormality, all the accessories in the group stop operating. In addition, the photo abnormality means that the movable accessory has not returned to the predetermined initial position. The role correction operation in the group is performed not only for the movable role at the problem location, but also for all movable roles in the group to which the problematic movable role belongs, using the predetermined role correction motor sequence data. By restoring the objects to their respective initial positions, the problematic movable accessory is restored to the correct initial position.

The accessory correction motor sequence data mainly defines the driving order of the motors to be driven and their operating times (in other words, the driving start timing and the driving end timing), etc., and is stored in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. stored in In the case of the above-mentioned accessory group 01, there are six movable accessories, so motors as drive sources for driving these six movable accessories are motor A (mask accessory) and motor B (torso deformation). Left role), Motor C (Torso deformation right role), Motor D (Torso retraction-appearing role), Motor E (Upper liquid crystal drive role), Motor F (Lower liquid crystal drive role). do.

When the recovery operation to the initial position is performed regardless of the role object group, the motors to be driven may be sequentially driven one by one. If such interference cannot occur, a plurality of motors may be driven. For example, the drive start timings may be staggered to drive them together, or a plurality of them may be driven simultaneously.

For example, assume that a photo anomaly is detected for the torso retract-out object (motor D). FIG. 171 is, as an example, a timing chart for the restoration operation to the initial position performed at this time. In FIG. 171, the restoration operation to the initial position is started at time t0. At time t0, the motor A is first driven, and at time t1, the driving of the motor A is stopped.

At the same time, that is, at time t1, the motors B and C are driven simultaneously. After that, at time t2, the motors E and F are driven simultaneously. Further, after that, at time t3, motor B and motor C are simultaneously stopped. After that, the motor E and the motor F are simultaneously stopped at time t4. At the same time t4, the motor D is driven. Then, at time t5, the driving of the motor D is stopped. That is, the recovery operation to the initial position is completed at time t5. It should be noted that the condition for stopping the driving of each motor is that photo detection is normal.

It should be noted that when two or more character object groups are performing a recovery operation to the initial position (referred to as a character object correction operation), the movement ranges of the movable character objects of different groups may physically interfere with each other. If there is no character object correction operation for two character object groups in parallel.

Also, when one role product group is performing a restoration operation to the initial position (referred to as a role product correction operation), the other role product groups that do not interfere with each other are the role product groups that are performing the role product correction operation. You may make it continue the production|presentation by performing the operation|movement for production|presentation irrespective of. By doing so, the performance using the movable accessory as a game machine does not have to be interrupted, and the performance can be continued.

Furthermore, due to an abnormality in one character group, it is necessary to perform a character correcting action in this character group. It is also possible to perform an effect only by the movable role products of other role product groups without performing the role product correction operation. Then, after the performance by only the movable accessories of the other role group is completed, the role product correction operation of the role product group determined to be necessary to perform the role product correction operation is performed. Also by this, the production using the movable accessories as a game machine does not need to be interrupted, and the production can be continued.

[Start timing of recovery operation to initial position]
The start timing of the restoration operation to the initial position of the accessory is when the power is turned on, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation ends, when the jackpot opens, when the jackpot ends, when the demo opens, when the demo ends, when the door opens, when the door closes, etc. Conceivable.

When the power is turned on, the role product correction operation for all the role product groups is always performed. For this reason, until the completion of the accessory correcting operation at the time of turning on the power supply, the announcement of the change and the accessory effecting operation related to the effect are not performed. The start timing of the character object correction operation related to the advance notice and the effect at the time of the change is effective from the next change after the completion of the character object correction operation when the power is turned on. Also, the accessory correcting operation at the time of turning on the power is always executed for all the accessories regardless of whether or not each accessory is at its origin.

For example, when the power is turned on, the character object correction operation is (1) to move the character object to the opposite side from the initial position, and remove the photo. (2) Next, the accessory is moved to the initial position and the photo is detected. Execute (1) and (2) for all roles. According to this, it is possible to reliably execute the performance operation by the movable accessory during the game after the game is started.

In addition, regarding the point that the start timing of the accessory correction action of the accessory group is set to the big win ending, in the case where there are six movable accessories such as the accessory group 001, the accessory group 001 can be Although it takes some time to perform the accessory correcting action, the big win game itself is over, so the player can be relieved that the accessory correcting action of the accessory group 001 is not related to the game.

[Retry during character correction operation]
When executing a character effect, initial operation when power is turned on, and movement to the origin (photo side) by performing a character correction operation, when the photo cannot be detected, for example, movable characters collide with each other. When it does not go well, one count is made, and when a predetermined number of times, for example, a total of 5 counts are reached, the character with the photo abnormality and the character including the character are included until the next time the power is turned on again. Makes the entire object group immovable. Regarding the 5-time count, since the count is 5 times continuously, the count returns to "0" if the photo detection is normal (detected) even once.

If the retry operation of the above-mentioned character object correction operation is performed and a photo is detected, the normal production state is restored. If it cannot be detected, the character object correction operation of the character object group determined to be necessary to perform the character object correction operation is not performed, and only the movable accessories of the other character object groups that can perform the production operation normally. You may make it act on behalf of production by.

In addition, when performing the accessory correction operation, if the number of times the photo cannot be detected even if the movable accessory is moved to the origin (photo side) continuously reaches a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the photo is abnormal. An example has been shown in which the abnormal accessory and the entire accessory group including that accessory are rendered inoperable. It may be configured so that the store clerk can change it any number of times.
As a result, it is possible to set an appropriate number of retries on the hall side when an abnormality occurs in the accessory due to the discovery of a defect after shipment or deterioration over time, and it becomes necessary to deal with this. For example, when photo abnormalities occur frequently, by setting the number of retries to be less than the standard number of times, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the player observes a complicated retry operation and loses interest in the player. It becomes possible.

Whether or not the above-described retry operation is to be performed for each movable role object in the role object group may be set for each type of the role object group. In this case, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, not only the production by the movable accessories that are not related to the main game (game contents directly related to the winning or losing) performed on the main control board 1310, but also the main game (auxiliary to winning or losing) There are some that perform production with movable accessories related to the game content related to). When a failure occurs in any of the plurality of movable accessories in the accessory group that cannot be restored to the origin position, a retry operation is performed for the movable accessories in the accessory group that do not hinder the game. may be omitted. On the other hand, production by movable accessories related to this game (game content related to winning or losing) In the case of a character group including a movable character, if any of the movable characters in this character group has a failure that cannot be restored to the origin position, a retry operation is performed. By doing so, it can be expected that the player can be relieved, and the effect of suppressing the decline in interest in the game can be expected.

Further, whether or not to perform a retry operation may be set depending on the type of effect to be executed. For example, when a movable accessory is used in a production with the aim of raising the interest of the game by producing a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as during a jackpot game, the role group to which the movable accessory used belongs: Make it perform retry operation. On the other hand, in the case of a normal game state or a reach state with low expectations, it is possible to prevent the retry action from being performed for movable accessories that are not related to this game (game contents directly related to winning and losing). is.

[Notification of operation abnormality of movable accessories when photo abnormality is detected]
It is conceivable to give some kind of notification when the movable accessory breaks down (including the case where the wiring connected to control the accessory is broken). When the movable accessory breaks down, the performance display device 1600 displays, for example, "Accessory is out of order" in a strip. The movable accessory starts notification when the accessory stop processing (counting 5 times) at the time of photo abnormality occurs.

Regarding the notification of the failure of the movable accessory, in addition to the display, it may be possible to perform the notification by sound. may be changed.

In addition, when not only a plurality of movable accessories or a board surface but also a movable body provided in a frame, for example, fails, notification may be made individually for each movable accessory or movable body. You may make it alert|report collectively as. At this time, when notifying individually, it may be displayed side by side so that the failure part can be specified on the effect display device, and for the sound notification, "It is a malfunction of the accessory" and any movable accessory or movable body is out of order.

In addition to the malfunction of the movable accessories and the movable body, for example, when the RAM is initialized, the RAM clear notification sound is sounded for a predetermined period, but in this way, it is different from the notification related to the production. When the situations to be notified overlap, it is preferable to give priority to the RAM clear notification as a situation that needs to be sounded with priority, especially for voice. At this time, after the RAM clear notification sound is sounded for a predetermined period, the accessory failure is notified.

[Another response when photo error is detected]
As a countermeasure when the movable accessory breaks down, as already explained, it is possible to perform the accessory correction operation, which is the recovery operation to the initial position, or perform the accessory correction operation and move it to the origin. When detection is not possible, the retry operation is performed with a predetermined number of times as the upper limit, but if the accessory still cannot return to the origin and the photo cannot be detected even after performing the predetermined number of retries, the accessory of the accessory group where the failure occurred. is left as it is in failure, and for the role product of the role product group in which the failure does not occur, the performance operation of the role product is continued.

As already explained in the schematic block diagram of the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. , and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and each control is shared. Among them, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and controls each effect device based on commands from the peripheral control section 1511. is done. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decoration board of the game board 5. , game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for sending to the drive solenoid or for outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc., and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc. provided in the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board. to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , and outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, it is determined whether or not all the characters forming the character object groups 01 to 05 are at the reference positions, that is, whether there is an abnormality in the character objects forming the character object groups 01 to 05. Determine whether it has occurred.
Then, when it is determined that all the character objects constituting the character object groups 01 to 05 are at the reference position and no abnormality has occurred in any of them, normal control of the character object is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 162, for example, in the role group 01, the mask role, the body deformation left role, the body deformation right role, the body retraction active role, the upper liquid crystal driving role, the lower It is composed of a liquid crystal driving accessory and the like. For example, when an abnormality occurs in the body transforming left hand object, depending on the location of the abnormality, the stopping position of the body transforming left hand object hinders the recovery operation of the body transforming right hand object to the original position. In some cases, it is an unrecoverable obstacle that cannot return all the accessories to the origin position no matter how many times it is retried. At this time, the RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511 has a flag indicating that it is in an unrecoverable state for each character group, and 0 is stored when the pachinko machine 1 is started. When the accessory group is in an unrecoverable state, 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to the unrecoverable accessory group.

Here, as already explained, the character object groups are grouped so as not to physically interfere with each other. Therefore, even if any one of the role product groups is in a non-restorable state, it is possible to continue driving the other role product groups.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the character product group that is in the unrecoverable state is left as it is, and the character product production is continued using the character products belonging to the other character product groups.

Specifically, a flag indicating the non-restorable state is read out from the RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511 . Then, when the flag corresponding to any of the accessory groups is 0, it is determined that no unrecoverable failure has occurred in any of the accessory groups, and after performing the origin return operation, Continue acting.

If 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to any of the role product groups, it is determined that an unrecoverable failure has occurred in that role product group. In that case, the continuation of the recovery action is stopped for the role product belonging to the role product group in which 1 is set in the flag and the unrecoverable failure has occurred, and the operation is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful consumption of electric power and failure of the accessory due to applying an unreasonable operation to the motor by performing the return operation repeatedly even though the return is impossible.

Here, the accessory may be an accessory that performs a performance action by the movement of a member. It is also possible to perform an effect using light emission, or to perform an effect in which the accessory itself is made to emit light by forming the accessory itself from a translucent member and using a light-emitting member such as an LED provided inside the accessory. be.

Here, if the drive signal for driving the character object and the light emission signal for emitting light from the LED that decorates the character object are separated from each other and the two can be independently controlled, an unrecoverable failure occurs. Regarding the accessories belonging to the role item group, the continuation of the return operation is stopped to stop the operation. Light emission control for emitting light itself can be performed without being affected by interference with the action of the character object, so it can be continuously performed. At this time, the performance control that should be performed originally may be performed. As a result, even for a role product belonging to a role product group in which an unrecoverable failure has occurred, it is possible to continue performance to some extent by continuing light emission control.

As another method, for a role object belonging to a role object group in which an unrecoverable failure has occurred, the light-emitting member provided in the role object or the role object itself is caused to emit light while stopping the operation of the role object. In light emission control, it is also possible to perform light emission control according to the occurrence location of an unrecoverable obstacle, the type of obstacle, etc., instead of the performance control that should be performed. As a result, it is possible to grasp the location of the failure and the type of the failure from the light emission mode of the accessory whose operation is stopped.

Then, for a role product group with a flag of 0, that is, a role product belonging to a role product group in which an unrecoverable failure has not occurred, normal performance control is performed. If a failure occurs in a part of the accessory and the control of the entire accessory motion is stopped, the accessory motion will stop completely, and there is a risk that the player's interest will be reduced. By leaving the function belonging to the faulty function group as it is and driving the function of the function group that does not physically interfere with the function of the non-restorable function group, As compared with the case where the accessory action is completely stopped, it is possible to perform accessory action control that enhances the interest of the player.

In addition, as described above, when the movable accessory malfunctions (not only the failure of the movable accessory itself, but also the disconnection of the wiring connected to control the movable accessory) It is conceivable that some kind of notification may be made in this case. As an example of notification when the movable accessory is out of order, there is a method of displaying, for example, "Accessory is out of order" on the effect display device 1600 in a strip shape. Also, as will be described later, when multiple abnormalities are detected, such as a connector abnormality and an operational abnormality of a movable accessory, each of the detected abnormalities can be displayed. , it is also possible to display the abnormalities in descending order of importance.

The detection that the movable accessory has failed and cannot be recovered is counted when the photo cannot be detected even if the accessory correction operation is performed to move it to the origin, and then it is retried several times. conduct. If photo detection is still not possible even after performing the accessory correction operation a predetermined number of times (eg, 5 times), it is assumed that the state is unrecoverable, and notification of the unrecoverable state is started.
Further, in notifying the malfunction of the movable accessory, not only the notification by the display in the effect display device 1600 but also the notification by sound may be performed. As the method of notification, notification by display, notification by sound, and notification by a combination of both may be mixed. etc., may be changed. Furthermore, a vibration speaker, which will be described later, may be used to notify by vibration. For example, when a plurality of anomalies are detected, it is possible to set such that anomalies with a high degree of importance are notified by display on the effect display device 1600, and anomalies with a low degree of importance are notified by sound.

In such an embodiment, it is not preferable that the notification by display and the notification by sound are performed more than necessary during the game being played. Therefore, it is preferable that the malfunction of the movable accessory is notified only by display during the game, or the volume is reduced even if the notification is made by sound.
Also, in this case, it is not necessary to consider other players around the player before starting the hall business when the game is not in progress. Therefore, with the aim of informing the people involved in the hall, it is programmed and set in advance so that the malfunction of the movable accessories can be confirmed when the power is turned on. You may make it inform a person concerned with a hall. In this way, it is preferable to set the period of notification as well.

There are various forms of business, such as large halls with hundreds of machines and small shops with a small number of machines. In particular, when there are few people involved in the hall in a large-scale store with a large number of machines, it may not be possible to check the accessory correcting actions for all the machines one by one. Even in such a case, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the failure in a more comprehensible manner by setting the display and sound to notify the hall personnel in an easy-to-understand manner as described above. Then, when it is found that the movable accessory has a failure, the hall staff can turn the power back on or perform repairs, thereby making it possible to remedy the failure. .

In addition, in the same way as the vibration speaker inspection (operation check) during the RAM clear notification period described above, it is also possible to execute the role item correction operation upon receipt of the RAM clear processing and RAM clear notification command. is.

In addition, abnormalities such as not returning to the origin due to foreign objects such as game ball B or dust being caught in a movable accessory provided at the bottom of the game machine (for example, a pop-up accessory of accessory group 05) is detected, the vibration speaker 354 generates a vibration that is transmitted to the movable accessory, and the control means executes the origin position recovery process to promote the recovery of the movable accessory to the origin position. good.

[Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, the automatic channel sound control, which is a part of the sound data creation process executed by the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 16 ms), will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, let me briefly explain the background.

In general pachinko machines, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene in accordance with the progress of a game, thereby realizing an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach should improve the player's expectations, there are some that output a variety of sounds depending on the type, and others that do not. In such a typical pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is assigned to a corresponding default channel. Channels are used for playback (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in general pachinko machines, even if there is a vacant channel, there are cases where the sound to be played cannot be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be played cannot be played. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to realize various sound productions.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the purpose is to make effective use of empty channels to realize various sound productions and increase the interest of the players. And each channel is dynamically assigned to each sound to be output from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the number of combinations of sounds to be output is determined by each channel. If the maximum number of channels (in this embodiment, 16 channels are exemplified) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically allocated to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output according to a predetermined priority within the range of the maximum number of channels. (channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1510a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds scheduled to be output through each channel dynamically allocated within the maximum number of channels in accordance with the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . A specific description will be given below.

[Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 172(A) and 172(B) each show an example of sound control by the fixed channel method as a comparison target for this embodiment. FIG. 172(A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. Sound control by the fixed channel method uses, for example, all 16 channels of reproduction channel 00 to reproduction channel 15 in the same manner as sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, which will be described later. It should be noted that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 172B shows an example of reproduction channel allocation for each sound. In sound control by this fixed channel method, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used, as shown in the figure. Here, as for the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural.

As for the "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure, the sound that has started to be reproduced should not be silenced until the end of reproduction under any circumstances. As for the channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and a sound are exclusively assigned as a pair so that the sound is not overwritten. On the other hand, the illustrated "normal BGM" to "pending prize winning sound" may be overwritten with another sound during reproduction to be muted. As for the channel assignment method, the same channel is assigned as much as possible so that reproduction timings do not overlap.

In sound control using the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel that is being output, the sound being output is muted and the new sound is output. For sounds that would cause problems if overwritten, independent channels are assigned, or sounds whose playback timings do not overlap are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 173 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, definitions of playback channel number, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound category and sound name. there is Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, the explanation is omitted. When a sensor such as the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects an abnormality due to an abnormality of a connector, etc., sound control of the category "abnormality notification sound" and the sound name "sensor abnormality detection" is performed.

In addition, when an abnormality is detected in the initial position detection sensor (photosensor) that detects the initial position (origin position) of the movable accessory described above, that is, when an abnormality in the operation of the movable accessory is detected, the classification "abnormality notification sound ” and the sound name “sensor abnormality detection” are controlled.
If you want to distinguish between an abnormality in the connector and an abnormality in the operation of the movable accessory, for example, in FIG. A dedicated channel may be provided as a fixed channel, for example, ch03 may be additionally allocated for detecting an abnormality in the initial position detection sensor when an operation abnormality is detected. At this time, it is preferable to allocate the abnormality detection to the fixed channel when using both the fixed channel and the automatic channel in order to reliably report the abnormality detection.

Further, when different types of abnormalities overlap when different types of abnormalities are distinguished, the degree of importance of the type of abnormality may be determined in advance. For example, if the importance is set to decrease in the order of RAM clear, magnetic detection, and accessory failure, if these abnormalities occur at the same time, the importance is high and the notification is given with the highest priority. An audible tone ("RAM cleared") identifying the RAM clear that must be performed may be provided.

In this case, among the abnormalities that occur in duplicate, since the importance of notification is higher for abnormalities with a high degree of importance than for abnormalities with a low degree of importance, the abnormalities with a low degree of importance are not immediately reported. The occurrence of an anomaly is stored, and after a high-priority anomaly is resolved or after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of notification of a high-priority anomaly, the stored low-priority anomaly is detected. A notification sound (“magnetism detected” or “accessory failure”) that identifies the error may be notified until the abnormality is resolved or for a predetermined period of time.

When anomalies occur in duplicate and are notified sequentially, the anomalies are notified in descending order of importance, and after the anomaly with the highest importance is notified, the anomaly with the next highest importance is notified. However, it is possible to set a longer notification period for alarm sounds for abnormalities with a low degree of importance, so that when an abnormality occurs, it is combined with a notification sound that identifies anomalies with a high degree of importance. While notifying an abnormality notification sound, set the volume of the high-priority notification sound to be louder and the low-priority notification sound to be low so that the high-priority notification sound can be heard better at first. At the end of the notification period for anomalies with a high degree of importance, the volume of the annunciation sound that identifies anomalies with a low degree of importance is increased so that they can be heard clearly. It is also possible to notify for a period of time.

Also, if the timing of the occurrence of the abnormality is different, for example, when the accessory malfunctions, the magnetism is detected while notifying that the accessory is out of order ("The accessory is out of order"). Therefore, when announcing the detection of magnetism ("magnetism detected"), the order of notifying is changed based on the type of abnormality as described above.
In this case, the mode of notification is switched from "Accessories are abnormal" to "Magnetism detected". Then, when the abnormality caused by the magnetism is resolved, the malfunction of the accessory is reported again.

Regarding the types of abnormality, the degree of importance is set to be low in order of importance: RAM clear, magnetism detection, and accessory abnormality. For other anomalies, the order of importance can be appropriately set according to each anomaly.
As for the form of notification, it is preferable to use any form of sound, display, or a combination of sound and display. For example, in the above example, while the voice notification is being given, the display device displays "The character is abnormal." Notify failure by voice. The mode of notification is switched according to the situation by using the speaker and the display device used for the production, such as by sound or by sound and display. In particular, regarding display devices, in recent years, multiple small liquid crystals have been used as performance devices. It is advisable to consider not to display it so as not to interfere with the game as much as possible.

The left-right pan initial value is the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the left and right speakers combined with the upper left speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). represents. By dynamically changing the set value of the left/right pan during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper left speaker and the upper right speaker is created, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. can be done. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that only the top center speaker 462 and the left speaker of the top side speaker 464 are output. , the sound volume difference individually output from , becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xff" indicates output from the right speaker only.

The vertical pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the sound by the upper and lower speakers of the pair of top side speakers 464 , the pair of top center speakers 462 , and one main body frame speaker 622 , for example. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from a pair of upper speakers. 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if "0xff" is set, it indicates that the sound is output only from the main body frame speaker 622, which is the lower speaker.

The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set within a setting range from "0x00" to "0xff", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration) that repeatedly plays back the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the drawing) that plays back the target sound once. It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 174 shows the relationship between game states, playback sounds, and playback channels. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the game state, and the game states are, for example, "first half of variation", "second half of variation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "jackpot in progress". ” can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and the (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

FIG. 175(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 175(B) shows an example of a channel playback time chart, and FIG. An example of a problem is shown. 175(A) to 175(C) have a common horizontal axis as a time axis.

In FIG. 175(A), along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis, the game states are shown in order of "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "jackpot". It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so that it becomes "medium".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 175(A), for example, as a new sound as shown in problem 1 of FIG. 172(B), the "pending winning sound" is assigned in advance to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "preliminary notice A", so "preliminary notice A ' is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the 'first half notice A' sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 172(B), as shown in FIG. 172(B), since the "pending winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen notice", the "full screen notice ” will be overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the “full screen notice” sound will stop (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 176(A) and 176(B) each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment.

FIG. 176(A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel, and the above-described sound control by a fixed channel means that the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to "AUTOch" in the drawing). The difference is that Here, that the channel division is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated according to the rules described later (see above). (equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

Sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment uses, for example, all 16 channels of playback channel 00 to playback channel 15 in the same way as sound control by the fixed channel method described above. It should be noted that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 176B shows an example of reproduction channel allocation for each sound. In this automatic channel system sound control, each sound is individually assigned a priority as shown. Here, as for the basic sound reproduction rules, as mentioned above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural. Become.

The "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure must not be silenced in the middle until the end of reproduction under any circumstances. On the other hand, the illustrated "normal BGM" to "pending prize winning sound" may be overwritten with another sound during reproduction to be muted.

In sound control by the automatic channel method, individual reproduction channels are defined as AUTO group channels (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to play sounds for the AUTO group. When assigning sounds to AUTO groups, each AUTO group can specify an identifier and priority for specifying a particular AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if it is a sound defined in the AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

In the above case, if there is no vacant channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced within the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as the sound being reproduced, the performance control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than or is not the same as the sound being reproduced.

FIG. 177 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound category and sound name, a playback channel number, an initial left/right pan value, an initial up/down pan value, an initial volume value, and a Identifiers and priorities for specifying AUTO groups (also referred to as “playback priority”), initial left/right panning values, initial up/down panning values, initial volume values, sound It manages definitions of number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates in which AUTO group among multiple AUTO groups each sound is reproduced. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced at the same time. The order of priority indicates that the higher the numerical value, the higher the priority of the sound to be reproduced, while the lower the numerical value, the lower the priority, the lower the priority of the sound to be reproduced. In this embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, notification sounds having a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3") , sound effects with a priority of "20" ("jackpot confirmation sound" and "button pressing sound"), BGM with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10" Sound effects (such as "full-screen preview sound effect"), sound effects with priority "05" ("first half preview sound effect" to "second half preview sound effect"), pending winning sound with priority "01" and As a result, in a state where there is no idle channel, for example, when an information sound is to be reproduced, there is no need to reproduce it using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound with the lower priority (for example, the pending winning sound ) is being played back, the notification sound is preferentially played back.

As already described, the left/right pan initial value is the sound produced by the left and right speakers combined with the upper left speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). represents the initial position of sound image localization. By dynamically changing the setting value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. This left/right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, if "0x00" is set, it indicates output from only the top center speaker 462 and the left speaker of the top side speaker 464 (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). , the difference in volume output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xff" indicates output from only the right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464).

As already described, the initial vertical panning value represents the initial sound image localization position of the sound from the upper and lower speakers of the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and one main body frame speaker 622, for example. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pan during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers is created, and the sound image is localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. can be done. This up/down pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, if it is set to "0x80", it indicates the volume difference that is individually output from the combination of the upper and lower speakers. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if "0xff" is set, it indicates that the sound is output only from the main body frame speaker 622, which is the lower speaker.

Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set, for example, in a setting range from "0x00" to "0xff". ), it is not affected by changes in volume due to the operation of one or more volume control devices installed in the game machine, and the volume is always played back at the initial value. represent. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

The seek point represents the reproduction start position number within the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as the seek points, for example, "0" is set for each of "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to "first half notice A sound effect", while "second half notice A sound effect" and "second half notice B effect" are set to "0". "Sound" is set to "1". When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source is exceeded by such seek points, it is possible to register sounds exceeding the maximum number that can be registered.

The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration) that repeatedly plays back the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the drawing) that plays back the target sound once. It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 178 shows the relationship between game states, reproduced sounds and priorities. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the game state, and the game states are, for example, "first half of variation", "second half of variation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "jackpot in progress". ” can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and the (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

FIG. 178(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 178(B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. 178(A) and 178(B) have a common horizontal axis as a time axis. In FIG. 178(A), the game states are shown in order along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis, in order of "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and " For example, the game is controlled so as to become a "big hit".

As shown in FIG. 179B, as part of the "first half of variation" shown in FIG. equivalent to range A). Here, when trying to reproduce the pending winning sound as a new sound because there was a start winning (corresponding to "suspended winning" in the figure), playback channels 12 and 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , Since this pending winning sound can be played back using playback channels 12 and 13, none of the sounds being played back are overwritten by the pending winning sound (equivalent to “holding sound playback” in the figure), and other Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

As shown in FIG. 179B, as a part of the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. equivalent to range B). Here, for example, when an attempt is made to reproduce a pending winning sound as a new sound due to a start winning (corresponding to "suspended winning" in the drawing), playback channels 04 to 05 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , all other types of sounds continue to be output without overwriting any of the sounds being played back with the pending prize-winning sound (corresponding to “play on hold sound” in the figure).

In the "latter half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 179(A), for example, a notification (equivalent to "notification 2 occurrence" in the drawing) is generated after that, so that the priority of the new sound is "25", which is the highest notification sound ( 179(B), it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing. Therefore, the sound with the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the reserved winning sound with the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 and 05, the pending prize winning sound is reproduced as described above. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the pending prize-winning sound, the pending prize-winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

FIG. 180 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control includes, for each channel, a setting reservation flag, requested sound number, playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority during automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, volume control, etc. for each channel as a work name. It contains work for control and work for pan control, and has respective information corresponding to them.

If the setting reservation flag has a value other than "0", it indicates that setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number indicates "-1" for stop, and other than "-1" indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound to be reproduced. The sound number during reproduction indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced when "-1" indicates stop, and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, a channel is fixedly allocated when the value is "0", and a channel is automatically allocated when the value is "1~" ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later). equivalent to ). Here, for example, if the automatic allocation group is "1", it indicates AUTO group 1, and if it is "2", it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority at the time of performing sound control by the automatic channel method, which will be described later.

The elapsed time from registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound being set to "0". In addition, the elapsed time from the registration is the time when a new sound is being played in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer period of time is identified, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound to be erased.

Volume control work stores volume values of sounds to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left-right pan and the up-down pan described above.

FIG. 181 shows an example of empty channel search processing when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method. Note that channels are abbreviated as “ch” in FIG. 181 as well.

When there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1100), the effect control program confirms the automatic allocation group for the new sound (step S1102), and if this automatic allocation group is "0", a fixed allocation and start playing a new sound on the specified channel.

On the other hand, the effect control program determines that the automatic allocation group is other than "0", and determines whether or not the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106). .

If the new sound is monaural, the production control program determines whether or not there is an empty (monaural) channel (1 channel) (step S1108). ) channel to start reproducing the new sound (step S1109), and if it does not exist, a reproduced sound equal to or lower in priority than the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether or not the channel exists (step S1110).

The effect control program terminates the process if there is no channel of the reproduced sound that is the same as or lower than the priority of the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced, while if it exists determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112).

If there are multiple applicable channels, the production control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time since registration among the applicable channels based on the elapsed time since the registration. (monaural) channel to start playing the new sound (step S1114). On the other hand, the effect control program starts playing the new sound on the (monaural) channel that satisfies the desired conditions when there is only one corresponding channel (step S1116).

On the other hand, in the above-described step S1106, if the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there is an empty (stereo) channel (2 channels) (step S1120). When the performance control program determines that there is a vacant channel, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired conditions and starts playing the new sound (step S1122).

On the other hand, if the performance control program determines that there is no vacant channel, it determines whether or not there is a (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced that has the same or lower priority as the new sound (step S1124), if it does not exist, the process is terminated, so the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, the effect control program, if it exists, determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126).

The effect control program starts outputting the new sound in a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired conditions if there are not a plurality of applicable channels, and if there are a plurality of applicable channels, Based on the elapsed time since registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started in the (stereo) channel with the longest reproduction time since registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130).

As described above, the effect control program searches for a vacant channel in order to reproduce new sounds. Such empty channel search processing will be described in a more visually comprehensible manner.

FIGS. 182(A) and 182(B) to FIGS. 185(A) and 185(B) respectively show an example of specific contents of the idle channel search process. As shown in FIG. 182(A), the effect control program searches for a vacant channel when a request for reproducing normal BGM with a priority of 15 is generated, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, playback of normal BGM in stereo is started using these playback channels 00-01.

As shown in FIG. 182(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel and reproduces channels 02 to 03 when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_A with priority 05 is generated. Since there are vacancies in the channel 02 and 03, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice _A is started in stereo.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(A), the effect control program, triggered by the generation of a request to reproduce a button pressing sound with a priority of 20, searches for an empty channel and selects reproduction channels 04-05. Since there are vacancies, these playback channels 04 and 05 are used to start playing back the button pressing sound in stereo.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_B with priority 05 is generated, and the reproduction channel 06 is selected. . . . 07 are empty, the playback of the effect sound of the first half notice _B is started in stereo using these playback channels 06-07.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 184(A), is triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce a jackpot confirmation sound with a priority of 20, searches for an empty channel, and selects the reproduction channel 08-09. Since there are vacancies, these reproduction channels 08 and 09 are used to start reproducing the big hit confirmation sound in stereo.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. Since there are vacancies in channels 10 to 11, playback of the sound effects of the first half notice _C is started in stereo using these playback channels 10 and 11.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. Since there are vacancies, these playback channels 12 and 13 are used to start playback of the pending winning sound in stereo.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. Since there are vacancies, playback of the notification sound 3 in stereo is started using these playback channels 14-15.

FIGS. 186(A) and 186(B) to FIGS. 189(A) and 189(B) respectively show examples of specific contents of the idle channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 186(A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce ready-to-reach BGM with a priority of 15, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, reproduction of reach BGM in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 00 to 01. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 186(B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the notification sound 1 with priority 25, and if there are any vacant channels in the reproduction channels 02-03. Since it exists, playback of the notification sound 1 in stereo is started using these playback channels 02-03.

After repeating the above-described processing, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. , and since there are vacancies in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, reproduction of the full-screen announcement sound in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 10 to 11. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel in response to a request to reproduce notification sound 1 whose priority is 25. As shown, there are vacancies in playback channels 02-03 (corresponding to "non-playback (empty)" in the figure), so playback of the effect sound of notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these playback channels 02-03. .

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 136(A), is triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce information sound 3 with a priority of 25, searches for a vacant channel, and reproduces channels 04 to 05 ( Since there are vacancies in the "non-playback (vacant)" shown in the drawing, playback of the notification sound 3 in stereo is started using these playback channels 04 and 05. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(B), the effect control program, triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the character object announcement sound with the priority of 10, searches for a vacant channel and selects the reproduction channel 12-13. Since there are vacancies in the channels 12 and 13, the reproduction of the character object announcement sound in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 12 and 13.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 189(A), is triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce a pending winning sound with a priority of 01, searches for an empty channel, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 ( Since there are vacancies in the "non-playback (empty)" shown in the drawing, playback of the pending winning sound in stereo is started using these playback channels 14-15.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 189(B), is triggered by the generation of a request to reproduce the notification sound 2 with a priority of 25, and searches for a vacant channel, but there is no vacant channel. Therefore, stop using the playback channels 14 to 15 that are playing the lowest priority "pending winning sound" in each channel corresponding to the sound being played, and use the playback channels 14 to 15 Reproduction of notification sound 2, which is a desired stereo sound, is started.

In this way, each sound scheduled to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a reproduction channel with a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule with a higher priority is searched. will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible not only to make effective use of empty channels as described above, but also to use each channel including the empty channels to reproduce each sound to be output as many times as possible. Since it can be played back, it is possible to realize various sound productions and increase the interest of the player.

FIGS. 190(A) and 190(B) to FIGS. 191(A) and 191(B) respectively show an example of specific contents of the idle channel search process. As shown in FIG. 190(A), the effect control program, triggered by the generation of a request to reproduce the left symbol stop sound with a priority of 15, searches for an empty channel, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00-01.

As shown in FIG. 190(B), the effect control program searches for a vacant channel when a request for reproducing the right symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and vacant channels 00 to 01 are available. exists, the playback channels 00 to 01 are used to start playback of the right symbol stop sound in stereo.

Next, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 191(A), is triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce a medium symbol stop sound with a priority of 15, searches for an empty channel, and reproduces channels 00 to 01. Since there are vacancies, the playback of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the effect control program searches for a vacant channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the jackpot BGM with a priority of 15, and vacant channels 00 to 01 are reproduced. , the reproduction of the jackpot BGM in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 00-01.

In addition, when the replacement reproduction of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. Needless to say, it is fine to do so.

[Sound control variations]
In the above embodiment, an example of performing sound control by the automatic channel method using all the reproduction channels corresponding to the maximum number of channels has been described. Sound control may be performed as follows by a combination or the like.

FIGS. 192(A) to 192(F) are diagrams showing variation examples of channel assignment in sound control by the above-described two types of channel methods or a combination thereof.

FIG. 192(A) shows an example of channel allocation in sound control by the fixed channel method for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 192(B) shows this example. It corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described so far, and shows an example of channel allocation when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. Since sound control by these two channel assignments has already been explained, detailed explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 192(C) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method (corresponding to "PTN2" in the figure). . FIG. 192(D) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed by the above-described fixed channel method for some playback channels. (corresponding to "PTN3" in the drawing).

FIG. 192(E) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed by the above-described fixed channel method for some playback channels. (corresponding to "PTN4" in the drawing). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 192(E) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 192 and subsequent drawings.

FIG. 192(F) uses one automatic channel group, performs channel allocation for the maximum number of playback channels, performs sound control by the automatic channel method, and performs sound control by the fixed channel method described above for some playback channels. However, the difference from the above example is that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of each playback channel is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 192(F) will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings from FIG. 192 onward.

As shown in this embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped together, based on a predetermined criterion, empty channels are assigned or channels being output are replaced, so that sound Sound can be output only by determining the priority of Therefore, unlike the conventional control method that outputs sound by specifying a channel, there is no need to manage the channel, so it is possible to simplify control related to sound output and improve development efficiency. becomes.

In addition, by adopting the automatic channel system, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the game machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, details of another form of the sound control method described above will be described. In the above-mentioned sound control system, by dynamically changing the allocation of sound to each channel as an automatic channel system, it was possible to effectively utilize empty channels and reproduce many sounds, but the game production was poor. In the diversified game machines of recent years, hundreds or thousands of different sounds are selected and output, which may complicate the management of sound sources.

Also, by outputting a plurality of sounds in a superimposed manner, the forewarning effect can be performed redundantly, or a variety of sound effects can be produced with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192(C), by dividing sounds into a plurality of groups and dynamically assigning a plurality of sounds and playback channels for each group, overlapping sounds are reliably output. can do. It also has the advantage of facilitating management by dividing sounds by type.

Furthermore, among sounds, there are sounds that should be output with priority over dramatic sounds, such as notification sounds, and sounds that are continuously output, such as BGM. For these sounds, it is convenient to fix the output channel rather than dynamically assigning channels. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192(D), sounds that are preferentially output and sounds that are always output are output by a fixed channel method, and sounds that change according to the results of starting winnings and variable display are Output by automatic channel method.

By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively utilize empty channels by the automatic channel system and to prevent unnecessary channel switching control by the fixed channel system. In addition, since it is possible to classify sounds according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, notification sound, etc., management of effect data is facilitated.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 192(E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 192(C) and 192(D), and has advantages of each method. The sound control method shown in FIG. 192(E) will be specifically described below.

[15-1. Sound control with mixed fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In this embodiment, unlike the example described above, the number of channels in sound source control is set to 32 channels (ch), and includes channels for reproducing sound by the fixed channel method and channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method. . Also, the channels for reproducing sound in the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. A specific description will be given below with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in tone generator control in this embodiment. As described above, the tone generator control of this embodiment uses 32 channels, and each channel is assigned a unique identifier (channel number).

The channel configuration table includes, for each channel number, "automatic assignment" indicating whether or not automatic assignment is to be performed, "classification" indicating the group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" of each channel. It should be noted that "Remarks" is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 193, the configuration of each channel in this embodiment is such that channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, channel numbers 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, numbers 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and numbers 24 to 29 are fixed channel systems. is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are a fixed channel system.

Further, the automatic channel type channels with channel numbers 8 to 19 are "AUTO group 1", and the automatic channel type channels with channel numbers 24 to 29 are "AUTO group 2".

The game machine in this embodiment can output sound in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, one channel is used for monaural output.

A channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as "channel 0" and each channel is represented by a "channel number" that is the number of the "channel" + 1) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting sounds commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is the sound that is output along with the manufacturer's logo being displayed when the game machine is started. Channel 1 is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used for outputting BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channels 4 and 5 are channels used to output BGM, and channels 6 and 7 are channels paired with channels 5 and 6 when BGM is output in stereo. be.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the sound quality of the BGM is improved by not only outputting in stereo, but also by simultaneously outputting a plurality of sounds. Therefore, a plurality (pairs) of channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output at the same time. Furthermore, as will be described later, BGM can also be output on channel 20 (and channel 21), so it is possible to output 4 BGM simultaneously using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It's becoming

While the game machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is set to a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control compared to reproducing sound only by the automatic channel method while preventing the occurrence of empty channels.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing sounds that are output when the advance notice effect is executed. In the announcement effect, a sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for sounds that are output each time based on a predetermined condition, channels can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method.

In this embodiment, unlike the example described above, the channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. AUTO group 1 is a group of channels for outputting sound during the announcement effect.

When outputting a sound during execution of the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1 . In the case of stereo, two empty channels are searched and, in principle, consecutive channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a vacant channel, it is set to output a designated sound from the vacant channel. On the other hand, if there is no vacant channel, the channel in use is released to output a new sound, or the output of the specified sound is stopped, based on a predetermined condition. A detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. Channel 21 is paired with channel 20 for stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM or sound effects. This is used when outputting BGM by superimposing four sounds, or when outputting a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in effects other than the advance notice effect output in the automatic channel system.

Channels 22 and 23, like channels 20 and 21, are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. Channel 23 is paired with channel 22 for stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels through which holding tone is output. The holding sounds output on the channels 22 and 23 are, for example, sounds output regardless of the lottery result at the time of start-up winning, or sounds that are preferentially output when a big win is confirmed. Sounds based on the results of the lottery at the time of start winning are output from channels 24 to 29, as will be described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 reproduce the sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the start of winning and the sound output when the hold display changes at the start of variation. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel system, even if there are no vacant channels in the channels 24 to 29, it is possible to surely output the sound when the big win is decided, and to attract the attention of the players. can be done.

Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. A channel 30 outputs a change sound when changing the volume and a notification sound when paying out game media. Also, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. In this way, a fixed channel system is applied in which the output destination is secured in advance so that the notification sound related to the operation of the game machine and the notification sound at the time of abnormality are reliably transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, fixed channel channels are assigned to sounds such as background music that are constantly output and to signals that need to be reliably output, such as abnormal alarm sounds. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sounds that are output flexibly according to the game state, etc., it is possible to prevent the sound from not being output even though there are empty channels, and to use the finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[Free channel search process]
Next, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for tone generator control in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of empty channel search processing when sound output control according to the present embodiment is executed. Although FIG. 181 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, FIG. 194 differs in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. Description of common processing is omitted.

In the empty channel search processing shown in FIG. 194, in the processing of steps S1108 and S1120, if the new sound is of the automatic channel method, it is determined whether or not there is an empty channel in the same group of channels. That is, if channels in different groups are vacant but there is no vacancy in the same channel group, the results of steps S1108 and S1120 are "No".

Furthermore, in the vacant channel search processing shown in FIG. 194, when there is no vacant channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step S1118, step S1132). Hereinafter, selection conditions for a channel for stopping sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the effect in which the output of the sound is stopped continues to be executed without stopping the image display and the action of the character.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of conditions for selecting a channel for switching sound output (stopping or releasing sound reproduction) when a channel is not available when a new sound is output in this embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and priority is given to the sound with the higher degree of importance. As will be described later, the attributes include playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, volume level, amount of change in sound during playback, etc. Furthermore, the playback time of sound at the time of channel selection, Remaining playback time is also included. Each condition will be specifically described below.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114 and S1130 in FIG. 181, channels with long playback times are selected. By selecting a channel with a long elapsed time from the start of reproduction in this way, the output of sufficiently executed performance sounds is terminated, and the player can easily recognize that a new performance has been executed.

Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire presentation. For example, since an effect with a longer reproduction time can be an effect with a higher degree of expectation, an effect with a shorter reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling an effect with a long reproduction time, the effect on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, determination is made based on the preset total playback time, regardless of the playback time from the start of playback.

Conditions 1 and 2 are conditions related to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of an effect with a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Alternatively, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the overall time of the effect, that is, the progress ratio of the effect. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the performance.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being played. For example, since an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output may be an effect with a higher degree of importance, a channel in which the volume of the sound being output is low is preferentially selected. On the contrary, it is also possible to preferentially select a channel with a large output sound volume, and make the player recognize that a new effect will be executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on changes in the volume of the sound being played. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output may be an effect with a higher degree of importance, and a channel with a small amount of volume change is preferentially selected. Conversely, channels with frequent volume changes may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic sound image localization position change (panpot). For example, it is possible to create a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the sound output of the left and right stereo speakers. Select with priority. On the other hand, it is also possible to preferentially select a channel whose dynamic sound image localization position changes frequently, thereby reducing the load of sound control.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on the note number (index). For example, a number with a large (small) tone number is selected. At this time, the priority may be associated with the tone number.

Condition 7 selects channels depending on whether the sound is mono or stereo. For example, a channel for outputting a monaural sound is selected assuming that a performance outputting a stereo sound with good sound quality is expected to have a higher degree of expectation. On the other hand, since only one channel is used for monaural sound, if the number of vacant channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is released, select a channel that outputs stereo sound to increase the number of vacant channels. can be

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether volume adjustment is permitted or not. For example, an effect set so as not to be able to adjust the volume may have a higher degree of importance, or an effect set so as to be able to adjust the volume may be given a higher degree of importance.

In addition to the conditions described above, for example, if the priority order is the same, a request to reproduce a new sound may be discarded without changing the channel. Also, by assigning a unique priority to all sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to give the same priority.

Although conditions 1 to 8 are shown as examples in the table shown in FIG. 195, these conditions may be applied alone, or a combination of multiple conditions may be applied. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition to select a channel that satisfies more conditions, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[Volume Control]
Next, an example will be described in which channel allocation control is performed based on the priority assigned to the sound to be newly output. Here, an example in which three types of advance notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 196 is a timing chart showing an example of effects for explaining the sound control of this embodiment, where (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channels from which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example of the order of priority of sound effects in the production example of this embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 196, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the first half notice _A is generated. At this time, an instruction to operate the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice _B is generated. Further, the first half notice C is generated while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145, the priority of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first half notice_C is 20. Furthermore, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice _B and the first half notice _C, when the lower priority notice effect is executed in duplicate in the same group, the volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value. reduced.

To explain the content of each notice, the first half notice _A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears. Along with the character appearing on the display screen, sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09 .

The first half notice _B is an effect executed by operating the effect button, and when the button is operated, the button pressing sound is played (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice _B is started, and the effect is performed in stereo from channels 10 and 11. A sound is output.

In the first half notice _C, sound effects are output (channels 12 and 13), screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and sounds with a lower priority than the first half notice _C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporary. is muted (blackout effect). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half notice _C is resumed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 198, changes in the volume of the sound effects of each advance notice effect will be described in more detail. FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing an example of changes in volume of sound effects in the first half of the present embodiment, where (A) shows output timing of sound effects and (B) shows changes in volume of sound effects. The horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis in (B) represents volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display starts at time t0, and the first half notice _A starts at time t1. At this time, the effect sound of the first half notice _A is output at the preset volume V_A.

After that, an instruction to operate the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice _B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button pressing sound of the production button is reproduced at the volume V_T, and the production effect sound of the first half notice _B is output at the volume V_B. Further, since the priority of the first half notice _B is higher than that of the first half notice _A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice _A is suppressed to 50%.

In addition, if the priority of the notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the notice effect being executed, the volume may not be lowered, and even if there are few sound effects being output at the same time No need to lower the volume. Also, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific advance notice effects.

Further, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened and sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted until time t5. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice _C is output at the volume V_C.

Also, the effect sound effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B that have been muted from time t3 are resumed at time t5. Normally, the button pressing sound is output until time t4, but since t5>t4, reproduction ends at time t3.

Thereafter, the effects of the first half notice _A and the first half notice _B are continued until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t7, the first half notice_B ends, and the first half of the fluctuation ends.

Note that during the period in which the sound effect is muted, the sound effect may be continuously output with the volume set to 0, or the sound effect may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub-volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire production sound effect is set to 0, and the sound effect of the first half notice _C is output. may be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by control by the main volume. Further, even when the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice _C, sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds with higher priority are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is reduced. Alternatively, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the same channel (fixed channel method, automatic channel method) may be lowered. Also, the volume of the sound being reproduced in the channels within the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[effect]
By configuring as described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output a sound having a high priority. The high-priority sound is, for example, a sound such as an information sound or a warning sound to be reliably transmitted to a player or an employee of a game hall. It may be a sound effect for increasing the expectation of the game, or a sound effect that has a high production effect and can improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by classifying each channel used for sound source control into a plurality of groups, it becomes possible to facilitate management of production data relating to production sound effects. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of development, such as preventing the occurrence of bugs through the implementation of systematic tests. In addition, by enabling a stable game, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there is a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs sound effects for advance notice production and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs sound effects related to holding. The number of sound effects for advance notice production is enormous compared to the number of channels, and moreover, multiple production sound effects can be played back at the same time. In particular, during the first half of the fluctuation, it is possible that the output of sound effect sounds exceeding the number of allocated channels is required, for example, the advance notice of the pending fluctuation is executed together with the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, it is possible to maximize the amusement of the game by outputting while replacing the low-priority performance effect sound with the high-priority performance effect sound within the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1. .

Furthermore, the change in the display of the variable display and the accompanying effect output of the effect sound to inform the degree of expectation can greatly increase the player's expectation, and it is desirable that the effect be surely executed. . In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound related to such on-hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the advance notice effect related to the variable display. can. In addition, unlike the announcement effect in the variable display, the number of effect sounds output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, so the output of the effect sound is stopped. less likely to be Further, even if the output is stopped, the output of the effect sound with the lower priority is simply stopped. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by surely executing the highly effective effect of increasing the expectation of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, channels to which the automatic channel system is applied and channels to which the fixed channel system is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, the finite number of channels are effectively used by searching for empty channels, and by setting the order of priority, it is possible to preferentially output sounds with a high degree of importance or effects. is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case of continuously outputting sound such as BGM, or the case of preferentially outputting sound to notify a malfunction of the game machine or a fraudulent act. In this way, by applying a suitable channel system according to the sound characteristics and usage, it is possible to effectively use each channel and perform appropriate control according to the sound output situation. For example, in the control of outputting BGM, regardless of the game state, it is sufficient to output the sound to a pre-assigned channel. output sound directly to . On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to make maximum use of empty channels and to preferentially output sounds with high production effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by controlling the volume of each effect sound (channel), it is possible to emphatically execute a high-priority effect. Also, the effect being executed can be continued while lowering the volume without interruption. At this time, it is possible to return the volume to the original volume if the previously executed lower priority performance is continuing even after the higher priority performance has ended. Also, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing a specific effect alone, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized. In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of effects and improve the amusement of the game.

Here, the sound source IC used for producing sound effects and BGM is also used to drive the vibration speaker 354 described above. By giving sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the production operation section 301 is vibrated.

Since the purpose of providing sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 is to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, the channel may be set each time the effect that causes the effect operation unit 301 to operate appears. Although it is the same sound information, in order to avoid confusion in nature with sound information that actually emits sound, such as sound effects and BGM, a fixed channel is used and assigned to a dedicated channel for the vibration speaker.

Further, as the sound information of the sound ROM to be referred to, as described above, it is a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz. This is intermittently sweep-inputted for 1 second and stored in a predetermined storage area of the sound ROM as sound information to be input again after 1 second.
Furthermore, by controlling the volume as described above, the volume of the high-priority performance is emphasized by increasing the volume. By increasing or decreasing the amplitude of the sine wave of the , the vibration is gradually strengthened or weakened gradually, just like adjusting the volume of the sound. I am using it.

Note that the sound source IC has been described as a single device having only that function, but a device in which a function corresponding to the sound source IC is built into the VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600 in the effect display control unit. Even in such a case, it is possible to control the vibration as long as the sound can be controlled in the same manner as described above. In such a case, the sound ROM and the image ROM may be hybridized, or the same device may be used, and the information used in each may be stored in advance. Also, the CPU and the control ROM for controlling these may be composed of the same device.

[15-2. Modified example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset numbers. A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels set to the fixed channel system are variable will be described.

[Production example]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds of the same type than the number of allocatable channels. For example, in the case of a game machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality (for example, 9 divisions) and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of an effect in a modified example of this embodiment. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 199 is an advance notice effect in the second half after the occurrence of reach.

In this modified example, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect (multi-screen effect) is executed in which different scenes are displayed on each screen. Then, one of the scenes is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, the BGM (nine kinds) of each scene is output simultaneously. It should be noted that the scene may be selected by lottery, or may be selected by the player.

The gaming machine of this modified example uses 32 channels for sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Also, default channel allocation is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output up to four types (eight channels) of BGM simultaneously. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modified example, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modified example, the channels for outputting BGM are reassigned, and the arrangement of the channels is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in a modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the default configuration and (B) shows the configuration when multi-screen presentation is executed. The default configuration of FIG. 200(A) is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 193, as previously described.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of channels shown in FIG. 200(A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 148(B). Specifically, channels of the fixed channel system for outputting BGM are added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 1 and adopting the automatic channel system is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if another notice effect is executed while the multi-screen effect is being executed.

After the start of the multi-screen presentation, all the BGM corresponding to each scene are reproduced while all the scenes are being displayed. At this time, if all the BGM is output at a normal volume, the volume will be too high, so the sound is output at a lower volume than normal. Then, when a scene is selected, an advance notice effect (second half advance notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the volume of the BGM of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and the reproduction of other BGM is terminated. . Also, when the player selects a scene, for example, he/she selects a divided screen using an operation unit provided in the game machine, and until the scene is determined, the BGM of the selected scene is played by another player. The volume of the BGM of the scene may be increased, or the volume of the BGM of other scenes may be decreased.

[15-2-3. volume control]
FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing an example of changes in the volume of sound effects in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) is the output timing of the sound effect, and (B) is the change in volume of each sound effect. indicates

In the production example shown in FIG. 201, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen production is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement changes from the default state (FIG. 200A) to the multi-screen production arrangement (FIG. 200B). )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the second half variation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 199, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after being changed to the layout for multi-screen effect (FIG. 200(B)) is output. At this time, output is performed at volume V_2, which is smaller than normal volume V_1.

After that, when a scene to continue rendering is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of other BGM is stopped. In the production example shown in FIG. 201, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the second half announcement_5 corresponding to scene 5 is executed.

Note that after the multi-screen effect is completed, the channels for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When continuing to output BGM from channels 10 and 11 as in this modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next variation.

Also, the channel arrangement may be changed when necessary. For example, in this modified example, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before starting execution of the multi-screen effect, or may be changed at the start of the second half variation.

Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the game state (for example, the effect mode such as a big hit state, a time saving state, a background change, etc.) changes.

[effect]
By configuring as described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to "variable fixed channels" in FIG. 192(F) "variable AUTOch") can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, it becomes possible to reproduce more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects depending on the situation. flexible measures such as suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds and increasing the number of BGM and sound effects to be reproduced for presentation.

In the embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Luckily, even in this case, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 10 outer frame left assembly 11 outer frame left member 11a concave portion 11b bulging portion 11c hollow portion 12 upper left connecting member 12a horizontal fixing portion 12b upper lateral fixing Part 12c Lower lateral fixing part 13 Lower left connecting member 13a Horizontal fixing part 13b Upper lateral fixing part 13c Lower lateral fixing part 13d Abutting part 20 Right outer frame assembly 21 Right outer frame member 21a Recess 21b Swelling part 21c Cavity 22 Upper right Connecting member 22a Horizontal fixing part 22b Upper horizontal fixing part 22c Lower horizontal fixing part 23 Lower right connecting member 23a Horizontal fixing part 23b Upper horizontal fixing part 23c Lower horizontal fixing part 23d Contact part 24 Upper hooking member 24a Mounting part 24b Hooking piece Part 25 Lower hooking member 25a Mounting part 25b Hook piece part 25c Insertion opening 30 Outer frame upper member 30a Notch 30b Mounting step 40 Outer frame lower assembly 40a Curtain plate inner space 41 Outer frame lower member 41a Notch 41b Recess 42 Front panel member 42a Opening 43 Rear panel member 43a Connection cylinder 43b Rib 44 Ball biting prevention mechanism 44a Mounting section 44b First discharge port 44c Second discharge port 44d Standing wall portion 44e Upper end projecting portion 45 Guide member 50 Outer frame Upper hinge assembly 51 Upper outer frame hinge member 51a Upper fixing portion 51b Forward extension portion 51c Bearing groove 51d Lateral fixing portion 51e Edge wall portion 52 Lock member 52a Lock body 52b Operating piece 52c Elastic portion 52d Mounting hole 53 Mounting screw 60 Lower outer frame hinge member 60a Horizontal portion 60b Rising portion 60c Lower outer frame hinge pin 60d Discharge hole

100 Door frame base unit 101 Door frame base 101a Door window 101b Handle mounting seat surface 101c Insertion recess 101d Cylinder insertion hole 101e Ball feeding opening 101f Lower tray ball passage opening 101g Upper tray ball passage opening 101h Glass unit mounting portion 101i Slit 101j through hole 102 handle mounting portion 102a cylindrical portion 102b flange portion 102c ridge 102d reinforcing rib 103 speaker duct 103a cable holder 104 door frame main relay board 105 door frame secondary relay board 106 rear handle relay board 107 door frame relay board cover 108 door Frame Rear Relay Board Cover 109 Cable Cover 100 Door Frame Base Unit 110 Door Frame Reinforcement Unit 111 Left Reinforcement Frame 112 Right Reinforcement Frame 113 Upper Reinforcement Frame 114 Intermediate Reinforcement Frame 114a Notch 114b Penetration 115 Cylinder Mounting Frame 116 Hook Member 120 Door Frame Hinge Assembly 121 Hinge Bracket 121a Mounting Piece 121b Protruding Piece 122 Door Frame Upper Hinge Pin 123 Flange Member 124 Lock Spring 125 Door Frame Lower Hinge Member 125a Mounting Piece 125b Protruding Piece 126 Door Frame Lower Hinge Pin

130 cylinder lock 131 cylinder body 132 keyhole 133 rotation transmission member

140 Ball feeding unit 141 Front cover 141a Entrance port 141b Ball outlet 141c Slit 141e Ball throwing opening 142 Rear cover 142a Hit ball supply port 142b Mounting recess 143 Ball removal member 143a Partition 143b Rotating rod 143c Operating rod 143d Weight 144 Ball feeding member 144a Blocking part 144b Ball holding part 144c Rod part 145 Ball feeding solenoid 146 Ball feeding operating rod 146a Steel plate 147 Ball feeding crank 147a Engagement part 147b Shaft part 147c Transmission part 148 Anti-tampering member 148a Upper piece part 148b lower piece portion 148c inclined portion

150 foul cover unit 150a penetrating ball passage 150b full ball socket 150c foul ball socket 150d ball outlet 150e storage passage 150f door opening/closing contact portion

151 unit body 152 lid member 153 movable piece 154 full tank detection sensor 155 spring

160 Glass unit 161a Mounting piece 161b Locking piece 161 Glass frame 162 Glass plate 163 Glass unit mounting member 163b Projection 163a Base

170 security cover 171 main body 172 rear projecting piece 173 locking piece

180 Handle unit 181 Handle base 181a Base 181b Front end 181c Groove 182 Handle 182a First projection 182b Second projection 182c Third projection 182d Fourth projection 182e Slit 182f Locking projection 183 Cover base 183a Mounting boss 184 Handle decoration substrate 185 Handle Cover 186 Inner base 187 Shaft member 187a Drive gear part 188 Transmission gear 189 Handle rotation detection sensor 189a Detection shaft 190 Handle return spring 191 Auxiliary spring 192 Handle touch sensor 193 Single button 194 Single button operation sensor

200 plate unit 201 upper plate 201a guide passage 201b ground metal fitting 202 lower plate 202a lower plate ball extraction hole 210 plate base unit 211 plate unit base 211a upper plate ball supply port 211b speaker port 211c lower plate ball supply port 211d notch 211e upper plate Ball feeding port 211f Placement protrusion 211g Slider insertion port 211h Handle insertion port 211i Cylinder insertion port 211a Top tray ball supply port

212 Upper plate main body 212a Production operation unit mounting portion 213 Mounting base 213a Insertion opening 213b Through-hole 214 Plate unit relay board 220 Ball rental operation unit 221 Base portion 222 Upper tray ball extraction button 223 Ball rental operation base 224 Ball rental button 225 Return button 230 Upper bowl before ball removal unit 231 Front base 232 Front slider 240 Upper bowl after ball removal unit 241 Rear base 241a Ball socket 241b Ball feeding guideway 241c Ball removal guideway 242 Upper plate ball removal slider 242a Actuation receiving part 242b Actuation Transmission part 243 Spring 244 Rear cover 250 Plate decoration unit 251 Lower plate main body 252 Plate unit main body 252a Upper side protrusion 252b Lower front decoration 252c Bottom plate 252d Lower plate opening 252e Front notch 252f Bottom notch 252g Handle insertion opening 252h Cylinder insertion opening 252i Effect operation unit mounting portion 260 Lower tray ball extraction unit 261 Lower tray ball extraction base 262 Slider 263 Lower tray ball extraction button 264 Spring 265 Lower tray ball extraction lid 266 Holding mechanism 270 Upper left plate decoration unit 271 Upper left plate decoration Body 272 Plate upper left reflector 273 Plate upper left decorative substrate 275 Plate upper right decorative unit 276 Plate upper right decorative body 277 Plate upper right reflector 278 Plate upper right decorative substrate 280 Plate lower left decorative unit 281 Plate lower left decorative body 282 Plate lower left reflector 283 Plate lower left decorative substrate 285 Plate Lower right decoration unit 286 Lower right decoration body 287 Lower right reflector 288 Lower right decoration substrate

300 effect operation unit 301 effect operation unit 302 rotation operation unit 303 pressing operation unit 303a center pressing operation unit 303b outer peripheral pressing operation unit 310 effect operation unit cover unit 311 unit lower cover 311a drain hole 312 unit front cover 312a plate center upper decoration 312b Plate center lower decoration 313 Plate center upper reflector 314 Plate center upper decorative substrate 315 Plate center lower reflector 316 Plate center lower decorative substrate 320 Operation part base 321 Body part 321a Bottom wall 321b Through hole 322 Flange part 323 Leg part 324 Upper mounting part 325 gear bearing portion 325 gear bearing portion 330 effect operation ring 331 ring mounting base 331a placement portion 331b boss portion 331c through-hole 332 rotation base 332a ring gear 333 bushing 334 ring retaining member 335 ring outer upper cover 335a outer upper surface portion 335b decoration Part 335c Outer upper cover mounting part 336 Ring outer lower cover 336a Outer lower surface part 336b Outer lower cover mounting part 337 Ring inner cover 337a Inner surface part 337b Cylindrical surface part 337c Inner cover mounting part 340 Rotation drive unit 341 Rotation drive base 342 Operation Ring drive motor 343 drive gear 344 transmission gear 344a first gear 344b second gear 345 transmission detection gear member 345a gear portion 345b detection piece 346 gear cover 347 first rotation detection sensor 348 second rotation detection sensor 349 sensor cover 350a ring side gear Part 350b Drive side gear part 351 Gear mounting member 352 Effect operation ring decoration board 352a Front decoration board 352b Rear decoration board 352i Effect operation unit attachment part 353 Decoration board cover 353a Front board cover 354 Vibration speaker

360 effect operation button unit 361 button unit base 361a base main body 361b leg portion 362 guide shaft 363 upper base 364 elevation base 364a guide hole 364b center hole 364c vertical wall portion 364d guide pin 365 elevation spring 366 central shaft 367 operation button elevation drive motor 367a operation Button elevation drive motor terminal 368 elevation drive gear 369 driven gear 370 elevation cam drive gear member 370a gear portion 370b connecting portion 370c elevation detection piece 371 elevation cam member 371a cam portion 371b first cam 371c locking portion 371d second cam 371e third Cam 371f Connected portion 372 Gear cover 373 Center button main body 373a Cylindrical portion 373b Bottom 373c Guide hole 373d Center opening 373e Press detection piece 373f Guide boss 374 Button spring 375 Center button cover 375a Top plate 375b Peripheral wall 376 Center button decoration substrate 377 Periphery Button decoration substrate 378 Peripheral substrate cover 378a Substrate portion 378b Cylindrical portion 379 Peripheral decorative lens 380 Peripheral button cover 380a Cylindrical portion 380b Annular portion 381 Press detection sensor 382 Lift detection sensor 390 Operation portion relay substrate unit 391 Board box 391a Motor cover portion 391b Circuit board box opening 391c Waterproof wall 392 Operation part relay board 392a Operation part relay board connector 393 Circuit board box cover 393a Circuit board box cover liquid guiding part

400 Door frame left side unit 401 Door frame left side base 402 Frame left side decorative substrate 403 Left side reflector 404 Door frame left side decorative body 402a Left side upper decorative substrate 402b Left side lower decorative substrate 403a Through hole 410 Door frame right side unit 410a Side window 410b Side window interior decoration 411 Door frame right side base 412 Side window interior decoration member 412a Connection base 413 Side window interior decoration base plate 414 Interior reflector 415 Right side reflector 415a Through hole 416 Door frame right side outer panel 416a Through hole 417 Door frame right side inner panel 417a Through hole 418 Door frame right side decorative board 418a Right side upper decorative board 418b Right side lower decorative board 419 Door frame right side decoration body

450 Door frame top unit 451 Door frame top base 451a Main body 451b Forward projection 452 Top upper cover 452a Opening 453 Door frame top decorative body 454 Door frame top bottom plate 454a Reinforcement rib 454b Central speaker port 454c Side speaker port 455 Door frame top Center decorative board 456 Door frame top left decorative board 457 Door frame top right decorative board 458 Top center reflector 459 Top left reflector 460 Top right reflector 461 Center speaker box 462 Top center speaker 463 Speaker bracket 464 Top side speaker 465 Top lower cover 466 Bottom Cover frame 467 Door frame top relay board 468 Door frame top top plate

500 main body frame base unit 501 main body frame base 501a base main body 501b game board insertion opening 501c game board mounting part 501d game board regulation part 501e shooting device mounting part 501f cylinder insertion opening 501g speaker opening 501h cable mounting recess 501i cable insertion opening 501j rear extension portion 501k upper hinge attachment portion 501l lower hinge attachment portion

502 Connection cable guide member 502 Connection cable guide member 502a Guide body 502b Frame piece 502c Mounting shaft 502d Through hole 503 Connection cable 504 Binding band 505 Game board lock member 510 Main body frame upper hinge member 520 Main body frame lower hinge assembly 521 Lower hinge No. Main body 521a Lower hinge hole for outer frame 522 Lower hinge second main body 522a Lower hinge hole for door frame 522b Regulating piece 530 Main body frame reinforcing frame 531 Left position regulating member 540 Ball shooting device 541 Shooting base 542 Shooting solenoid 543 Ball hitting mallet 544 Shooting Rail 550 Payout base unit 551 Payout base 551a Top plate portion 551b Left plate portion 551c Right plate portion 551d Back plate upper portion 551e Back plate left portion 551f Inner plate portion 551g Bottom plate portion 551h Connecting plate portion 551i Back cover mounting portion 551j Storage case portion 552 Ball tank 552a Mounting portion 552b Mounting portion 552c Mounting portion 552d Mounting portion 552e Mounting portion 553 Tank rail 554 First rail cover 555 Second rail cover 556 Ball rectifying member 557 Ball stop member 558 External terminal plate 558a Case portion 559 Earth circuit board 560 Dispensing unit 570 Ball guide unit 570a Guidance passage 571 Guidance unit base 572 Guidance passage front lid 573 Movable piece member 574 Ball cutting detection sensor 580 Dispensing device 580a Dispensing passage 580b Ball extraction passage 581 Dispensing device main body 581a Main body side guide wall 582 After dispensing device Lid 582a Rear Lid Side Guide Wall 583 Dispensing Device Front Lid 584 Dispensing Motor 585 Drive Gear 586 First Transmission Gear 587 Second Transmission Gear 588 Dispensing Gear Member 588a Dispensing Gear 588b Detection Piece 589 Dispensing Blade 589a Blade 589b Sphere Housing 590 Blade Rotation detection sensor 591 Dispensing detection sensor 592 Ball removal movable piece 593 Ball removal lever ER1, ER2 Earth resistance

600 Upper full ball path unit 600a Upper payout ball receiving passage 600b Upper ball storage passage 600c Upper normal payout passage 600d Upper full payout passage 600e Upper ball extraction passage 601 Upper full tank base 601a Back cover mounting part 602 Upper full tank cover 603 Payout Device pressing member 610 Lower full ball path unit 610a Lower normal payout passage 610b Lower full payout passage 610c Lower ball removal passage 611 Lower full tank base 612 Lower full tank cover 613 Payout passage open/close door 613a Operating projection 614 Closing spring

620 board unit 620a speaker unit 620b base unit 620c power supply unit 620d payout control unit 620e interface unit 621 speaker cover 621a speaker mounting portion 621b space front recess 621c connection portion 621d penetration tube 622 main frame speaker 623 speaker box 623a penetration tube 624 enclosure 625 Front base 626 Rear base 627 Ball removal guide part 628 Ball receiving part 629 Ball discharge port 630 Power board 631 Power board cover 632 Payout control board box 633 Payout control board 634 Board base 635 Interface board 636 Interface board cover 640 Back cover 650 Locking unit

651 Unit base 652 Door frame hook 653 Outer frame hook 654 Transmission cylinder 655 Lock spring 656 Outer frame unlocking lever

1000 Front constituent member 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guide part 1004 Right lower rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Blocking part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Out mouth 1009 Security recess 1010 Notch 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 opening 1120 panel holder 1121 through hole 1122 notch

1200 Substrate holder 1201 Discharge unit 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status indicator 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 Normal reservation indicator 1404 First special symbol indicator 1405 First special number of reservations Indicator 1406 Second special symbol indicator 1407 Second special pending number indicator 1408 Round indicator

1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1511 Peripheral control unit 1512 Effect control unit 1520 Peripheral control board box

1600 effect display device (also called game board side effect display device)
1601 Left fixing piece 1602 Right fixing piece

2000 front unit 2001 general winning opening 2002 first starting opening 2003 gate part 2004 second starting opening 2005 big winning opening 2100 starting opening unit 2200 side unit

2400 attacker unit 2401 gate sensor 2402 second starting opening sensor 2403 big winning opening sensor 2404 starting opening solenoid 2405 attacker solenoid

2500 center accessory 2501 warp entrance 2502 warp exit 2503 stage 2600 presentation unit

3000 back unit 3001 general winning opening sensor 3002 first starting opening sensor 3003 magnetic sensor

3010 back box 3010a opening 3010b liquid crystal mounting portion 3010c fixing groove 3010d notch 3010e fixing piece 3020 lock mechanism 3031 panel relay board (drive board in FIG. 169)
3100 back effect unit

4000 detection sensor (original position detection sensor in FIG. 169)
4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor signal input section 4163 Voltage output section 4164 Detection circuit section 4165 RTC control section 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 avoidance unit 4167 avoidance unit 4170 lamp drive board 4200 game ball taxiway unit 4510 avoidance unit unit STR transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 Connector RR Contact resistance CON2 Connector CON3 Connector member CON4 Connector member 4504 to 4506 Connector member 5000 Accessory group 01
5002 Accessory group 02
5004 Accessory group 03
5006 Accessory group 04
5008 Accessory group 05
CN11 connector CN12 connector CN13 connector CN14 connector CN15 connector 5591 Ground wire 5592 Ground wire 5593 Ground wire 5594 Ground wire 5595 Ground wire

Claims (1)

Production control means for controlling production in a game;
a movable accessory having a light-emitting part that is controlled for the performance by the performance control means and is operable within a predetermined operating range from an initial position where the motion is started;
a motor for driving the movable accessory;
drive current supply means for supplying drive current for driving the movable accessory to the motor based on the drive data output from the performance control means;
In a game machine equipped with
an initial operation means for operating the movable accessory to be positioned at an initial position as an initialization operation executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started before the hall business is started;
position detection means for detecting that the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position;
retry operation means for moving the movable accessory to the initial position when the position detection means does not detect that the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position;
Although the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position by the retry operation means, the movable accessory is not positioned at the initial position, and the movable accessory is not positioned at the initial position by the position detection means. Abnormality determination means capable of determining that an abnormality has occurred in the movable accessory based on the detection result when it is not possible to detect that it is located in the
a notification means that can notify the outside when the abnormality determination means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the movable accessory,
The movable accessory determined by the abnormality determination means to be in an abnormal state is prohibited from being operated by the movable accessory operation prohibiting means without being operated by the retry operation means,
The mode of notification performed by the notification means is that an abnormality has occurred in the movable accessory at the time of the initialization operation executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started before the hall business is started. In the case where it is determined by the abnormality determination means, and in the case where it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable accessory during the performance of the movable accessory in which the movable accessory is operated during the game. The determination of abnormality by the abnormality determination means is common during the initialization operation and during the performance of the character object, but different modes are used,
The movable accessory is configured to be operated by the initial operation means when power supply to the game machine is started before the hall business is started, and the operation by the initial operation means is completed. Until then, the above-mentioned role production is not performed ,
The movable accessory determined to have an abnormality is prohibited from operating by the movable accessory operation prohibiting means, but the movable accessory whose operation is prohibited by the movable accessory operation prohibiting means is The light emitting effect by the light emitting unit having is made executable
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images